Home

Circuit-Breakers/Non-Automatic Circuit

1. Standard design Optional connection variants Horizontal connection Front connection single lt 320 _ _ 62 5 350 m ce a 5 4 B g 554 55 55 155 o a T 1 S 213 5 3 2 1 2 bd p j THH Moo 6 a S l nw ise a es Nig S 3 lt 11 a j 5 J o l l N Fil g tf fos HY TET ALS Ty LETY 1 13 L30 Ta qed o Lo LelQlol al g 0 210 55l i Ea 300 g B Front connection double hole 350 NSE0_00624b 7 8 to DIN 43673 260 Z9 Ha 13 5 55 557 vt i o f J fd t 3 S d L ji o 4 S oy Le 3 l N 2 i Hr il o A i i p i b HIH No Qo UF i i D o ise i H N 1 ae K m 11 amp reii 7 g i ok T L27 290 5 hr 367 5 45 d a Wy A i l 382 5 88 5 x 3 L 5 l 121 5 t H l 8 8 140 5 ke 1 EP i b pq c gt L169 sal L Ae 90 90 f 90 Vertical connection 350 5 im 350 1u 55 155 155 755 Se i i a ao 8 11 2 gt 7177 il a N ii 3 if l f i i S i
2. For basic circuit breaker Size Jn max Switching capacity Number type class of poles 3wL11 06 L up to 1000A N S 3 4 B 3WL9111 0AM50 0AA0 1unit on req a 2 8 10 3 4 3wL11 12 _ up to 1600 A N S 3 4 B 3WL9111 0AM51 0AAO 1unit on req a 2 8 163 4 M o 3wL12 08 _ _ up to 2000 A N S 3 B 3WL9 111 0AM52 0AA0 1unit on req sh 2 g WO 20 3 3 aaa 3wL12 25 _ L to 2500A N S 3 B 3WL9111 0AM54 0AA0 1unit onre L a A rl a u 3WL9 111 0AM50 0AA0 Cae P k a 3 3 3wL12 32 _ _ up to 3200 A N S 3 B 3WL9 111 0AM56 0AA0 1 unit on req 2 3 3 8 3wL12 08 _ up to 2000 A N S H 4 B 3WL9111 0AM53 0AA0 1unit on req m 2 A 20 3 4 3wL12 25 _ _ up to 2500 A N S H 4 B 3WL9111 0AM55 0AA0 1unit on req 2 4 3 4 3WL12 32 _ up to 3200 A N S H 4 B 3WL9111 0AM57 0AAO 1unit on req 2 4 3 4 3wL12 08 L up to 2000A H 3 4 B 3WL9111 0AM53 0AA0 1unit on req u AB 20 4 4 3wL12 25 0 L up to 2500A H 3 4 B 3WL9111 0AM55 0AA0 1unit on req 4 3 4 4 3wL12 32 _ _J up to 3200A H 3 4 B 3WL9111 0AM57 0AA0 1unit on req 4 3 4 4 3WL13 40 4_ L Ill upto5000A H 3 4 B 3WL9111 0AM58 0AA0 1unit on req a 4 8 50 4 4 3WwL13 63 _ J Ill upto6300A H 3 4 B 3WL9111 OAM60 0AAO 1unit on req 4 3 4 4 5 54 Siemens LV 30 2004 This quantity or a multiple thereof can be order
3. When ordering circuit breakers in the following versions Order Order No with Z Add Z to the complete Order No and code BWwN6e gg eee indicate the appropiate ordericode s Withdrawable and additional order code s circuit breaker with C guide frame Guide frame Order No with Z 12345 67 8 910 11 12 3WX3683 A 0 Z and additional order code s CLO bee Hae Code for Further versions Z For withdrawable circuit breakers with guide frame For guide frames Bus connecting between guide frame and RI3 9 Coo lead for communi connecting lead to interface cation only DP 3WN6 including circuit breaker required if guide presence signaling switch frame is ordered separately Main terminal for Front accessible up to 1600 A RIO 2 coo rated current connection at top and bottom up to 2000 A Main terminals see holes in up to 2500 A Page 5 85 connecting bars to 3200 A DIN 43673 double hole Front accessible up to 1600 A RIO 3 Coo connection at top and bottom up to 2000 A single hole connecting bars up to 2500 A 3200 A Rear up to 1600 A RIO 7 CLT vertical terminal up to 2000 A at top and bottom up to 2500 A 3200 A 13 14 With position indi Connected Test position Discon R13 coo AKA cator actuated by position 1NO 14NC nected posi RJT 4 rt withdrawable cir 1NO 1NC 2NO 2NC tion cuit breaker 3NO 3NC 1NO 1NC 1NO 1NC With shutter up to 1600 A
4. ar 4 pole design 1 Mounting space for removal of the arc chutes 3 Slots 4 mm wide 5 mm deep for supporting phase barriers in the system 4 Auxiliary connector with SIGUT screw type terminals 5 Auxiliary connector with tension spring connection 6 Dimension to inside surface of the closed cabinet door 7 Fixing points for mounting the circuit breaker in the system 11 Terminal face 12 Top edge of circuit breaker only AC 1000 V design Clearance to grounded parts Optional connection variants Front connection single 47 NSE00634c Front connection double hole to DIN 43673 mil NSE00637c NSE00640b_ 1 15 j He128 5 Rated circuit breaker current A up to 2000 2500 3200 wo oO 1 in 2 11 3 2 H wo ise LoL lo ry Jas g 90 130 13 5 90 90 90 m 2 a Q 40 40 Te Had be ive mi g Ls 11 2 Jo bH j i Q 90 130 41301130240 13 5 b INSE00641 3J ieee 90 130 4130 130 a b c 10 10 10 15 15 20 30 30 20 Safety clearances to grounded parts as well as to live parts see page
5. 4 6 810 20 40 60 100 200x Current Tripping characteristics of electronic trip units version Key to illustrations above Inverse time delayed electronic trip unit a I T In Te Time lag class permanently set to 10 s Current setting adjustable Ig Current setting 50 or 100 J for den N conductor ty 0 005 Opening time Tolerances according to IEC 60947 mine the total break times of the circuit breakers approximately 15 ms must be added to the opening times shown for the arcing S Le 2000 N con ductor 1y 50 I ANSEO_01150 0 1 0 05 0 02 0 01 0 4 0 6 1 ID 2 4 6 810 20 40 60 100x Current gt Tripping characteristics of electronic trip units version C G Short time delayed short circuit release z Operating current adjustable Delay time adjustable Tripping characteristic n Tripping characteristic g definite time delayed Opening time Opening time 60 4
6. DP AS Interface gateway Signalling column M M 3 3 AS Interface Fd ANSEO_01125 i343 H 4 o Compact o starter Modules in IP67 in IP65 BERO proximity switch SIGNUM actuators Communication via PROFIBUS DP e Tripped switch and mechanical closing lockout As standard the circuit breaker is equipped with an S11 alarm switch and a mechanical closing lockout for the common over load and short circuit signal and depending on the setting and version of the electronic trip unit the ground fault signal The tripped signal and the standard mechanical mechanism to prevent closing remain active until the reset button is operated on the circuit breaker When the circuit breaker has tripped this is indicated by the protruding reset button If the circuit breaker has to be ready to close immediately after tripping an automatic mechanical reset mechanism is avail able but this does not reset the electrical signal from the tripped switch S11 The tripped signal then has to be reset by operating the Reset button The electronic trip unit offers a further option to display the cause for tripping see trip unit under Functions Electronic trip unit General description Fixed mounted and withdrawable version Fixed mounted
7. ETU45B ETU55B ETU76B Y v Y Y v Y Y v Y Y Yv Y a Q Q Y v Y Y v Y Y Yv Y Y Yv Y Y Yv Y Y Yv Y Y v Y Y v Y Yv Y Y Y Yv Y Vv Yv Y Y a Q Q a a Q m a Q m Y v Y Qa Q QO Qa Q m Siemens LV 30 2004 5 13 Circuit Breakers Non Automatic Circuit Breakers up to 6300 A SENTRON WL eE ELE Electronic overcurrent trip units ETU The electronic overcurrent trip unit is controlled by a micropro cessor and operates independently of an auxiliary voltage It en ables systems to be adapted to the different protection require ments of distribution systems motors transformers and generators Communication capability The international standard PROFIBUS DP can be used to trans mit data such as current values switching states reasons for tripping etc to central computers Data acquisition and energy management are possible in con junction with the measurement function A new internal circuit breaker data bus allows switchboard panel communication between the circuit breaker and second ary devices in the circuit breaker panel e Actuation of analog displays e Ability to test the communication build up with circuit breakers e Display of release status and tripping reasons e Input module for reading in further switchgear panel signals and for transmission of these signals to the PROFIBUS DP e Various output modules for displaying measured val
8. Size ll Type 3WL12 10 3WL12 20 3WL12 40 Rated current J at 40 C Main conductor A up to 1000 2000 4000 Rated operating voltage U DC V up to 600 1000 up to 600 1000 up to 600 1000 1000 V design see Page 5 37 Rated insulation voltage U AC V 1000 1000 1000 Rated impulse withstand voltage Uimp Main circuits kV 12 12 1 Auxiliary circuits kV 4 4 4 Control circuits kV E 25 25 Isolating function to EN 60947 2 yes yes yes Permissible ambient temperature Operation C 25 75 25 75 25 75 Storage C 40 70 40 70 40 70 Permissible load up to 40 C A 1000 2000 4000 at rear horizontal main up to 55 C A 1000 2000 3640 circuit connections up to 60 C A 1000 2000 3500 Cu painted black up to 70 C A 1000 1950 3250 Power loss at Jn with AC symmetrical load Withdrawable circuit breaker W 280 770 1640 Operating times Make time ms fie 35 35 Break time ms 34 34 34 Electr make time via closing solenoid ms 100 100 100 Electr break time via shunt release ms ii 73 73 Electr break time instantaneous undervoltage release ms fie 73 73 Service life mechanical without maintenance Operating cycles 10000 10000 10000 mechanical with maintenance Operating cycles 15000 15000 15000 electrical without maintenance Operating cycles 6000 6000 4000 1000 V design Operating cycles 1000 1000 1000 electrical with maintenance Operating cycles 15000 15000 15000 Operating frequency 600 V design 1 h 60 60 60 1000 V desi
9. Pey y A 170 51 j 130 90 NSE0_00607a T3 Size Ill 3WL9 111 0AA33 0AA0 240 30 30 30 Door cutout for operator s panel when using door sealing frame Option with without door sealing 314 130 Oo KR 493 O00 _ 160 184 NSEO_00608a NSEO_00610c Dimensions for option with door interlocking 1 Mounting surface 2 Center SENTRON WL operator s panel 3 8 borings for mounting of door sealing frames 4 3 borings for mounting of door interlockings 350 i i i i i 4 i i i i i G j 65 175 11 5 Siemens LV 30 2004 5 59 Circuit Breakers Non Automatic Circuit Breakers up to 6300 A SENTRON WL Project planning aids Door cut out for operator panel using the protection cover IP55 ry 4xR5 1 4x 5 5 ae P43 oo 295 N 2 vy 2 5 i F O t g Circuit breaker mounting level T m 352 Safety distances to earthed parts Nominal rated voltage above V AC auxiliary connector mm Size I fixed mounted design 440 751 690 75 Size l withdrawable design without arc chute cover 440 50 690 500 Size l withdrawable design with arc chute cover 440 0 690 0 Size
10. Increment size for adjustment of menu comm or comm Delay time figures given in ms vy Available From to Increment size From to Increment size M motor protection corresponds to 20 ms Not available Dat 0 1 1000 1600 50 D rotary coding switch Q Optional 4 100 1 1600 10000 100 D amp S rotary coding switch and sliding dolly switch 100 500 5 10000 max 1000 Pe ea ee 500 1000 10 B 5 26 Siemens LV 30 2004 SENTRON WL General data Protection functions ETU45B ETU55B ETU76B Configuration via D amp S K M K Overload protection v v v Function can be switched on off v v Setting range Ip I x 0 4 0 45 0 5 0 55 0 6 0 4 ai cos 0 65 0 7 0 8 0 9 1 Switchable overload protection v v v Pt or tdependent function Setting range for time lag class tp at Pt 2 3 5 5 5 8 10 14 17 21 25 30 s 2 305 2 30S Setting range for time lag class tp at I t 1 2 3 4 5 s Vee OS dios Thermal image can be switched on off v v v Phase loss sensitivity at ta 20 ms M vy on off y on off Neutral conductor protection v v v Function can be switched on off v v v N conductor setting range Iy Jn x OS 3 I Oe on 2 O22 orc 2 Short time delayed short circuit protection v v v Function can be switched on off v v v Setting range Isg Ip X 1 25 1 5 2 2 5 3 4 6 8 10 12 WSF oon OLN ES
11. Li L2 L3 N 3WN6 NSE0_01131 Three pole circuit breakers current transformers in the neutral conductor Current transformer T5 must be con nected to auxiliary current connec Electronic trip unit version tion eC D E H J 400 13 400 14 N P 300 1 300 2 For 4 pole circuit breakers the fourth current transformer for the N conductor is installed internally for the electronic trip unit version E and J it must be mounted externally to the in coming or outgoing feeder side Current transformer T5 must be connected to auxiliary current connection 400 13 400 14 Electronic trip unit version e EJ Siemens LV 30 2004 5 88 Direct acquisition of the ground fault current by means of a current transformer in the grounded neutral point of the trans former The current transformer is installed directly into the grounded neutral point of the transformer L1 L2 L3 N T6 NSE0_01132 Three pole circuit breakers current transformers in the grounded neutral point of the transformer Current transformer T6 must be con nected to auxiliary current connec tion 400 13 400 14 Electronic trip unit version 0 EJP NSE0_01133 Four pole circuit breakers current transformers in the grounded neutral point of the transformer connection as for three pole circuit breakers Additional functions 1 e External DC 24 V supply
12. 630 630 50 B 3WL11 06 20042 1unit 50 000 65 B 3WL11 06 30042 1 unit 50 000 800 800 50 B 3WL11 08 201042 1unit 50 000 65 B 3WL11 08 3042 1 unit 50 000 1000 1000 50 B 3WL11 10 201042 1unit 50 000 65 B 3WL11 10 30042 1 unit 50 000 1250 1250 50 B 3WL11 12 201042 1unit 50 000 65 B 3WL11 12 30042 1 unit 50 000 1600 1600 50 B 3WL11 16 201042 1unit 50 000 65 B 3WL11 16 30042 1 unit 50 000 Il 800 800 80 B 3WL12 08 30042 1 unit 67 000 Il 1000 1000 80 B 3WL12 10 30042 1 unit 67 000 Il 1250 1250 80 B 3WL12 12 3042 1 unit 67 000 Il 1600 1600 80 B 3WL12 16 30042 1 unit 67 000 Il 2000 2000 55 B 3WL12 20 20042 1unit 67 000 80 B 3WL12 20 30042 1 unit 67 000 i 2500 2500 55 B swe 25 20042 1 unit 71 000 Be B 3WL12 25 3042 1 unit 71 000 3200 3200 B 3WL12 32 30042 q1 unit 77 000 verica main circuit connection l 630 630 50 B 3WL11 06 20041 1 unit 50 000 B 3WL11 06 30041 1 unit 50 000 800 800 50 B 3WL11 08 20041 1 unit 50 000 B 3WL11 08 30041 1 unit 50 000 1000 1000 50 B 3WL11 10 20041 1unit 50 000 65 B 3WL11 10 301041 1 unit 50 000 l 1250 1250 50 B 3WL11 12 20041 1unit 50 000 65 B 3WL11 12 30041 1 unit 50 000 1600 1600 50 B 3WL11 16 20041 1unit 50 000 65 B 3WL11 16 30041 1 unit 50 000 Il 800 800 80 B 3WL12 08 30041 1 unit 75 000 Il 1000 1000 80 B 3WL12 10 30041 tunit
13. Siemens LV 30 2004 5 119 Project planning aids 3WN6 fixed mounted circuit breakers 4 pole Horizontal connection SA2 5422a ja A i lity SA2 5424a 270 _ gt Front connection SA2 5320a Bl cancun SA2 5316a Fixing holes for support bracket o 0 11 SA2 5319a R 7 7 7 Tt 400 455 ry i ar m pn _ 3 LOL SA2 5425a 35 gt he ao ne 8 ke je je je i 7 1 c i 1 c 1 y 3i 3 8 X ao IZA RSs led be C he C le CO Clearance for lifting out the arc chute Space for auxiliary supply connectors Space above arc chute Auxiliary supply connectors Switchboard door Recessed grip Nut M 8 Slots 4 mm deep for line side phase barriers Center line of operator panel For safety clearances see Page 5 117 L3 LOLI N SA2 5426a Single hole Double hole Holes in bars to DIN 43673 Rated current a b
14. MECH l SFE T i x100 9 x10014 x20013 Y Y 1 N 634 N t34 L2 L2 L L Al Electronic trip unit 1 S2 1st auxiliary switch block S3 S4 2nd auxiliary switch block S7 Ready to close signaling switch S8 Storage spring contact S9 Motor switch S10 Electrical ON button 11 Tripped switch FA tst shunt release f F2 2nd shunt release f F3 Undervoltage release r F5 Trip solenoid M1 otor for charging store P Storage spring Q01 Hand operated lever for charging store Q1 ain contacts T1 T2 T3 Current transformer X100 X200 Terminals I Closing solenoid R ndication and reset button for overcurrent tripping 5 124 Siemens LV 30 2004 Circuit Breakers up to 3200 A Discontinued Series Project planning aids Indicator switches for the switch positions in the guide frame Order code R13 Order code R14 3WX36 84 1JA10 3WX36 84 1JC10 Discon Test Connected Discon Test Connected nected position position nected position position position position a a _ ey _ _ 7 7 7 7 j 7 if 7 7 a 7 i i 7 7 iy 7 p 8 2 i 1 5 i 1 r aca i i r E 4 aes PA MAN 7 q S30 sf4 S31 3 j1 533 aji i S80f3j1 S31 3 1 S32 3 1
15. with 4 line display FB FB ETUS5S5B protection functions LSIN JB JB ETU76B prot func LSIN with pixel graphics display NB NB Design with ground fault protection ETU27B protection functions LSING DG DG ETU45B protection functions LSING EG EG ETU45B prot functions LSING with 4 line display FG FG ETUS5B protection functions LSING JG JG ETU76B prot func LSING w pixel graphics display NG NG Standard Order No supplements for further Order No supplements for circuit breakers and guide frames see Page 5 36 Manual operating mechanism with mechanical closing Without 15t and 2 auxiliary releases auxiliary switch 2 NC 2 NO 1AA2 1AA2 For footnotes see Page 5 31 5 30 Siemens LV 30 2004 This quantity or a multiple thereof can be ordered Circuit Breakers Non Automatic Circuit Breakers up to 6300 A SENTRON WL 3 pole w awable design Size Max rated circuit breaker Rated current High switching capacity H 440 V PS Weight current Th EN per PU Tn max C o supplemen approx A A kA DT ge 5 3 kg Without guide frame for guide frames see Page 5 45 800 800 100 B 3WL12 08 4010135 1 uni 60 000 1000 1000 100 B 3WL12 10 40035 1 uni 60 000 l 1250 1250 100 B 3WL12 12 440035 1 uni 60 000 1600 1600 100 B 3WL12 16 40035 1 uni 60 000 2000 2000 100 B 3WL12 20 4010135 1 uni 60 000 2500 2500 100 B 3WL12 25
16. 1unit 102 000 80 B 3WL12 25 30037 1 unit 102 000 Il 3200 3200 80 B 3WL12 32 30097 1 unit 113 000 With guide frame connecting flange l 630 630 50 B 3WL11 06 20038 1unit 70 000 65 B 3WL11 06 30038 1 unit 70 000 800 800 50 B 3WL11 08 20038 1unit 70 000 65 B 3WL11 08 30038 1 unit 70 000 1000 1000 50 B 3WL11 10 20038 tunit 70 000 65 B 3WL11 10 30038 1 unit 70 000 l 1250 1250 50 B 3WL11 12 20038 tunit 70 000 65 B 3WL11 12 30038 1 unit 70 000 1600 1600 50 B 3WL11 16 20038 tunit 70 000 65 B 3WL11 16 30038 1 unit 70 000 Il 800 800 80 B 3WL12 08 30038 1 unit 91 000 Il 1000 1000 80 B 3WL12 10 30038 1unit 91 000 Il 1250 1250 80 B 3WL12 12 30038 1unit 91 000 Il 1600 1600 80 B 3WL12 16 30038 1unit 91 000 Il 2000 2000 55 B 3WL12 20 20038 1unit 91 000 80 B 3WL12 20 30038 1 unit 91 000 Il 2500 2500 55 B 3WL12 25 20038 1unit 102 000 80 B 3WL12 25 30038 1 unit 102 000 Il 3200 3200 80 B 3WL12 32 30038 1 unit 113 000 Non automatic circuit breakers Order No supplements Order No supplements without electronic trip unit AA AA without electronic trip unit communication AB AB measurement function optional E Electronic trip units Design without ground fault protection ETU15B protection functions LI BB BB ETU25B protection functions LSI CB CB ETU45B protection functions LSIN4 EB EB ETU45B protection functions LSIN
17. ia NSEO_01126 Selective short circuit delayed short circuit protection z io NSEO_01127 Instantaneous short circuit protection n T NSE0_01128 Ground fault protection g For sensing of fault currents that flow to ground and that can cause fire in he plant m NSE0_01129 General data Electronic trip units versions B and N In all electronic trip units the following functions are included as standard e Integrated function test The test button can be used to test the electronic trip unit using an integrated test function with or without tripping of the circuit breaker the solid state trip unit trip solenoid and breaker mechanism are tested e Active LED Correct operation of the electronic trip unit is indicated by the heartbeat of a green flashing LED When the operating current exceeds the response threshold of the overload protection this is indicated by rapid flashing e Cause of tripping The cause of tripping can be queried locally and displayed by pressing the Query button e uP faults A microprocessor fault is signaled by a warning indicator also optionally via an optocoupler as well e Overtemperature If the temperature in the electronic trip unit exceeds 85 C this is indicated by an LED also optionally via an optocoupler Indication on electronic trip unit version N Siemens LV 30 2004 Circuit Breakers up t
18. 439 Haa 123 5 275 680 N yt m 20r E 890 NSEO_00658c syd joel a iq 12 g doo H a aa z 5 F Ai RTS lear 0 230 5 iH m 541 5 451 275 150 lo j b 7 76 m 327 5 45 10617 127 35 F 7210 210 210 pols Lisom 35 S 139 1 243 aa 704 914 NSEO_00661b NSE00664a 130 h 210 210 ii 4 pole design 210 130 1 Mounting space for removal of the arc chutes 3 Slots 4 mm wide 5 mm deep for supporting phase barriers in the system 6 7 1 Terminal face Clearance to grounded parts 4 Auxiliary connector with SIGUT screw type terminals 5 Auxiliary connector with tension spring connection Dimension to inside surface of the closed cabinet door Fixing points for mounting the circuit breaker in the system 2 Top edge of circuit breaker only AC 1000 V design Optional connection variants Front connection single 47 r 60 160 a F I E E lo NSE00656c Front connection double hole to DIN 43673 oy Q ive z 5 11
19. Standard Order No supplements for further Order No supplements see Page 5 36 Manual operating mechanism with mechanical closing Without 15t and 2 auxiliary releases auxiliary switch 2 NC 2 NO 1AA2 Footnotes for pages 5 28 and 5 29 1 Rated current determined by rated current module On the standard design the supplied module is equal to the max circuit breaker rated current If a lower rated current is required adaptation by order code on page 5 37 2 Permissible short time current rating Jg and rated short circuit making capacity I for non automatic circuit breakers see Page 5 20 3 Required accessories PROFIBUS communication setup or Measurement function Plus Order No with Z and order code F02 or FO5 respec tively see Page 5 38 This quantity or a multiple thereof can be ordered 4 Current transformers for vectorial summation current formation or for pro tection of the neutral conductor and current transformers for detection of the ground fault current in the grounded star point of the transformer must be ordered separately see Page 5 46 5 Size III circuit breakers are not available with electronic trip unit design ETU15B 6 ETU45B to ETU76B with ground fault protection module GFM AT alarm and tripping see Page 5 46 E Start of delivery on request Siemens LV 30 2004 5 29 Circuit Breakers Non Automatic Circuit Breakers up to 6300 A SENTRON WL 3 pole with
20. a Breaker Data Calibration operation monitoring and diagnosis of B 3WL9 111 0AT28 0AA0 1 unit on req Adapter SENTRON circuit breakers via local interface Breaker mm BDA Data Adapter connecting cable to SENTRON circuit breaker and to programming device e g notebook can be run with Internet Explorer with JAVA2 VM 1 4 0 01 BDA Plus Same as BDA but with additional Ethernet interface for B 3WL9 111 0AT33 0AA0 1 unit on req connection to Ethernet Intranet Internet SS Connecting cable Connecting cable for connection of BDA and BDA Plusto C 3WL9111 0BC20 0AA0 1 unit on req E for BDA and LCD ETU trip unit of circuit breaker SENTRON VL BDA Plus length 1m Connecting cable Connecting cable for connection of BDA Plus to terminal B 3WL9111 0BC21 0AA0 1 unit on req for BDA Plus X8 of circuit breaker SENTRON WL Neca Required if neither COM 15 nor other external CubicleBUS eee 4 modules are available length 2 m 3WL6 111 0AB01 Parameterization Calibration operation monitoring and diagnosis of A 3ZS2 311 0CC10 0YA0 dunit on req TESS eTES Q OSO2O00 Device SENTRON circuit breakers via PROFIBUS DP runs under Windows 95 Windows 98 Windows NT Windows 2000 and Windows XP Professional requires additional PROFIBUS card e g CP5613 Accessories for communication software Switch ES Power proneusoe EN Factory connected 0 2 m long for connection to SENTRON WL with COM15 B 3
21. 20 0 S 0 60 ms I lt 50 ms G 0 ms 60 ms Siemens LV 30 2004 If l E SENTRON WL Project planning aids Every electronic trip unit type and every setting has its own char acteristic Only a selection is shown in the following The charac teristics each show the largest and smallest setting range of SENTRON WL circuit breakers with 1000 A rated current at 440 V rated voltage with various trip units In order to obtain a complete tripping characteristic the relevant parts of the characteristics have to be combined The characteristics show the behavior of the electronic trip unit when it is activated by a current that is already flowing before the tripping operation Ifthe overcurrent tripping occurs immediately after switch on and the electronic trip unit is therefore not yet en abled the opening time is extended depending on the level of the overcurrent by up to 15 ms In order to determine the total break times of the circuit breakers approximately 15 ms must be added to the opening times shown for the arcing time Refer to the following table for tolerances The characteristics shown apply to ambient temperatures at the circuit breaker between 5 and 55 C The trip unit can be op erated at ambient temperatures of 20 to 70 C An extended tolerance band can apply at these temperatures NSE00601a j 10000 v 1000 100 10 01 10000 100000 I A 100 1000 SE
22. 25 20 2s kA 3s kA 1 at Us DC 300 V 3 at U DC 1000 V 2 at U DC 600 V Siemens LV 30 2004 5 77 Non Automatic Circuit Breakers for DC up to 4000 A SENTRON WL 3 and 4 pole fixed mounted design Selection and ordering data Max rated circuit breaker current Tn max OR DT Horizontal main circuit connection ll 1000 1 unit 56 000 ll 2000 1 unit 56 000 1 unit 67 000 Il 1 unit 64 000 1unit 77 000 Vertical main circuit connection L1 unit 56 000 B 1 unit 56 000 3 3WL12 40 800 Tunit 64 000 Front main circuit connection single hole 3WL1 1unit 56 000 B 2000 Tunit 56 000 B Front main circuit connection double hole ll 1000 Il 1000 B a 1 unit 56 000 B Il 2000 WL E 0 1unit 56 000 B L Be 1unit 67 000 Non automatic circuit breakers Order No supplements Order No supplements without electronic trip unit AA AA Standard Order No supplements for further Order No supplements see Page 5 36 Manual operating mechanism with 1AA2 1AA2 mechanical closing Rated voltage DC 1000 V order with Z and order code A05 All other accessory parts must be ordered with Z and order codes see Circuit breakers non automatic circuit breakers up to 6300 A SENTRON WL Options Page 5 36 onwards 1 Provisons to dissipate heat must be made on the line side 2 For permissible short time current rating Joy and short c
23. 4 Auxiliary connector with screw type terminals SIGUT 5 Auxiliary connector with screwless connection system tension spring 6 Dimension to inside surface of the closed cabinet door 7 Fixing points for mounting the circuit breaker in the system 8 Secure OFF locking device 9 Key operation 11 Termination surface Optional connection variants Front connection single it NSE00612b 451 c 82 L Front connection double hole to DIN 43673 47 NSE00615b 541 6 gt NSE0_00618c Rated circuit breaker current A up to 1000 1250 1600 page 5 60 NSE00613b NSE00616b ca fo lt i Ke 2 n sickened endl EDAT ESENES ia d z H Q o oO F 14 NSE00619 eb AA a b 10 10 IS 15 Siemens LV 30 2004 11 c 10 15 Safety clearances to grounded parts as well as to live parts see Circuit Breakers Non Automatic Circuit Breakers up to 6300 A SENTRON WL Project planning aids Size I up to 1600 A withdrawable design 3 and 4 pole
24. Project planning aids 8 i oo ai Sa a i oO oO ja e L 1 7 y S Lo 8 oOo TI we leg le c la co Clearance for lifting out the arc chute Space for auxiliary supply connectors Space above arc chute Auxiliary supply connectors Switchboard door Recessed grip M8 nut Slots 4 mm deep for line side phase barriers Center line of circuit breaker Safety clearances No additional safety clearance is required to adjacent grounded parts above the circuit breaker on fixed mounted circuit breakers identified with 3 The clearance between the connection point and the support for the busbars must not exceed 250 mm Single hole Double hole Holes in bars to DIN 43673 Up to a rated operating voltage of AC 415 V Rated current amo CEE jem i omh i k m n the busbars running vertically such as in the case of front A accessible connection do not have to be screened if the 630 1000 e008 320 eon s eom 320 E 8 B30 183 Zom 3200 Bee busbar system is not arranged above the circuit breaker In contrast live bare conductors and 1250 1600 300 320 90 15 60 30 20 530 18 40 300 338 busbars at voltages above AC 415 V that are arranged 2000 400 420 120 15 80 40 40 20 560 22 44 400 438 above the circuit breaker and when power is supplied from 2500 3200 400 420 120 30 80 40 40 20 560 22 44 400 438 ab
25. R130 to prevent closing with the cabinet S40 EEE RIALO door open on withdrawable version active in con nected position to prevent movement with the cabinet RI5 0 door open Connection system for auxiliary conductors Connections for screwless connection system tension spring NGH co P6 1 Locks must be ordered from the manufacturer 2 Padlock not included in the scope of supply E Start of delivery on request Siemens LV 30 2004 5 40 Circuit Breakers Non Automatic Circuit Breakers up to 6300 A SENTRON WL Add Z to the complete Order No and Order Order No with Z indicate the appropriate order code s code 1234567 8 9101112 13141516 B8WL 2 and additional order code s 000 Code for Further versions Z For withdrawable circuit breaker including guide frame Order code or guide frame only for 3 and To select this connection system the 12th 4 pole digit of the Order No for the circuit breaker must be a 6 Connection system for main circuit connections Top and bottom Size up to 1600 A accessible from front Size Il up to 2000 A single hole Size II up to 2500 A PIOLO Size Il up to 3200 A Size IIl up to 4000 A Top and bottom Size up to 1600 A accessible from front Size II up to 2000 A double hole Size Il up to 2500 A PON Size Il up to 3200 A Size Ill up to 40
26. S33 3 j1 S34 3 1 S35 3 1 z l ie 4 7 L L reo ee fase ee _ J ra LT I j i 4 2 4 2 4 2 i l 4 2 4 2 4 2 4 2 4 2 4 2 l l i l l l ra ft o ts rom J J J ft lt 1 gt lt 2 gt lt 3 gt lt 1 gt lt 2 gt lt 3 gt Contact position with Circuit breaker in l l l disconnected U l l l l l position Circuit breaker in l I U l test position l l U U J l l LU l Circuit breaker in l l l connected position l l l l l l Contact closed Contact open Circuit diagram for optional equipment FIA lt 21 gt 1st shunt release F1 Storage device for 1st or 2nd shunt release lt 22 gt Auxiliary switch for lt 21 gt F1 or F2 lt 27 gt 2nd shunt release F2 a s 5 P z lt 28 gt Auxiliary switch for lt 27 gt 8 Se lt 91 gt or lt 92 gt External electrical lt OFF gt by F1 or F2 all lt 91 gt 3 se PA button only i a E gt X200 3 100 113 FA FEJ Loe go gofua 3WX31 56 1JG01 and 3WX31 56 1JJ01 storage devices for shunt release with stored energy feature Further information For planning guides with further descriptions relating to design operating principle installation and retrofitting see manual 3WN6 circuit breakers for low voltage Order No E20001 P285 A571 V2 in German For further information on the selection ordering and project planning of communication capable circuit breakers refer to th
27. This means that it is also possible to block the circuit electrical ON button breaker against being jogged into closing a 10 Installation location for CASTELL FORTRESS or KIRK KEY lock An energy storage device for shunt releases allows the circuit breaker to be opened even if the control voltage is no longer Opening closing and locking devices available The undervoltage release r is available without delay as stan dard jumper selectable to 100 ms by customer In addition the undervoltage release rc with a delay in the range from 0 2 to 3 2 s is available For further information on the selection ordering and project engineering of communication capable circuit breakers refer to section 3 Communication capable circuit breakers and the manual Communication links for 3VF 3WN6 3WN1 3WS1 circuit breakers to PROFIBUS DP Order No E20001 P285 A644 V1 Undervoltage release rc with delay for mounting in 3WN6 circuit breaker Siemens LV 30 2004 5 93 Circuit Breakers up to 3200 A Discontinued Series e Yal ye 1 ELE Module for mutual mechanical interlocking The module for mutual mechanical interlocking can be used for one or two 3WN6 circuit breakers and can be adapted easily to the corresponding versions The fixed mounted and withdrawable circuit breaker versions are fully compatible and can therefore be used in a mixed con figuration in an installation The circuit breakers can be mounted a
28. f h i k m n 630 up to 1000 280 320 90 8 60 30 455 470 157 5 115 37 90 1250 up to 1600 280 320 0mm 15 60 30 455 KOR 157 5 115 37 90 2000 380 420 120 15 80 40 465 480 157 5 115 40 140 2500 up to 3200 380 420 120 30 100 50 465 480 150 130 40 140 5 118 Siemens LV 30 2004 Circuit Breakers up to 3200 A Discontinued Series Project planning aids SA2 5333a 3WN6 circuit breakers withdrawable version 3 pole Front connection SA2 5331b SA2 5332a Q OO oo oo 3 p E a 2 9 oo Lolo h oO 4 ZTA TTA met A 9 b me a L 250 75 90 gt 90 gt 513 5 le 120 120 13 5 oria M a Single hole 630 to 1600 A Single hole 2000 to 3200 A Le Rated current a b G d e 4 A SA2 5335b 630 1000 60 8 390 408 Sa25334a o oHoloHo o 1250 1600 60 15 390 408 OO jolo O 2000 80 40 20 420 445 2500 3200 100 50 20 420 445 Guide frame Switchboard door Slots 6 mm deep 3 5 mm wide for line side phase barriers Center line of circuit breaker ome O O O OF WTA 2 ojo oq alp i lea Pes x 420 120 o Double hole 630 to 1600 A Double hole 2000 to 3200 A Holes in bars to DIN 43673 Holes in bars to DIN 43673 For safety clearances see Page 5 117
29. protection functions LSI CB ETU45B protection functions LSIN EB ETU45B protection functions LSIN with 4 line display FB ETUS5S5B protection functions LSIN JB ETU76B protection functions LSIN with pixel graphics display NB Design with ground fault protection ETU27B protection functions LSING DG ETU45B protection functions LSING EG ETU45B protection functions LSING with 4 line display FG ETUS55B protection functions LSING JG ETU76B protection functions LSING with pixel graphics display NG Standard Order No supplements for further Order No supplements for circuit breakers and guide frames see Page 5 36 Manual operating mechanism with mechanical closing Without 15t and 2 auxiliary releases auxiliary switch 2 NC 2 NO 1AA2 Footnotes for pages 5 34 and 5 35 4 Current transformers for vectorial summation current formation or for pro 1 Rated current determined by rated current module tection of the neutral conductor and current transformers for detection of i i i the ground fault current in the grounded star point of the transformer must the st dd th to th rat A k pap cas Fe regret et neste anes be ordered separately see Page 5 46 or they can be ordered by adding If a lower rated current is required adaptation by order code on page 5 37 the supplement 2 and order code F23 see Page 5 37 2 Permissible short time current rating and rated short circuit making 5 Size
30. tunit 70 000 65 B 3WL11 10 30036 1 unit 70 000 1250 1250 50 B 3WL11 12 201036 tunit 70 000 65 B 3WL11 12 30036 1unit 70 000 1600 1600 50 B 3WL11 16 20036 tunit 70 000 65 B 3WL11 16 30036 1 unit 70 000 Il 800 800 80 B 3WL12 08 30036 1 unit 91 000 Il 1000 1000 80 B 3WL12 10 30036 1unit 91 000 Il 1250 1250 80 B 3WL12 12 30036 1unit 91 000 Il 1600 1600 80 B 3WL12 16 30036 1unit 91 000 Il 2000 2000 55 B 3WL12 20 20036 tunit 91 000 80 B 3WL12 20 30036 1 unit 91 000 Il 2500 2500 55 B 3WL12 25 20036 1unit 102 000 80 B 3WL12 25 30036 1 unit 102 000 Il 3200 3200 80 B 3WL12 32 3036 1 unit 113 000 630 630 50 B 3WL11 06 201037 unit 70 000 65 B 3WL11 06 30037 1 unit 70 000 800 800 50 B 3WL11 08 201037 tunit 70 000 65 B 3WL11 08 30037 1unit 70 000 1000 1000 50 B 3WL11 10 201037 1unit 70 000 65 B 3WL11 10 30037 1 unit 70 000 1250 1250 50 B 3WL11 12 201037 tunit 70 000 65 B 3WL11 12 30037 1 unit 70 000 1600 1600 50 B 3WL11 16 201037 tunit 70 000 65 B 3WL11 16 30037 1 unit 70 000 Il 800 800 80 B 3WL12 08 3007 1unit 91 000 Il 1000 1000 80 B 3WL12 10 30037 1unit 91 000 Il 1250 1250 80 B 3WL12 12 3007 1 unit 91 000 Il 1600 1600 80 B 3WL12 16 30037 1 unit 91 000 Il 2000 2000 55 B 3WL12 20 20037 tunit 91 000 80 B 3WL12 20 30037 1 unit 91 000 Il 2500 2500 55 B 3WL12 25 201037
31. viewing angle adjustment option e The protection functions can be set by means of a rotary coding switch or sliding dolly switch For technical details see table Function overview of the electronic overcurrent trip unit sys tem under Technical specifica tions Circuit Breakers Non Automatic Circuit Breakers up to 6300 A ETU55B electronic overcurrent trip unit BREAKER TRIPPED Option safety lock WB RESET prevents pressing of reset button after overcurrent release Mechanical RESET for reclosing lockout E Se Indicators Overcurrent release activated Overload alarm COMMUNICATION EXPANDED Indicator fault in Rated current module overcurrent release Fields for noting setting values Fields for noting setting values Indicator cause of release Option earth fault module ndicators Earth fault alarm Earth fault tripped __ Fields for noting setting values Fields for noting setting values Test pushbutton Clear pushbutton Query pushbutton YP Test socket NSE0_00958 ETU76B electronic overcurrent trip unit BREAKER TRIPPED Option safety lock Wm ESET prevents pressing of reset button after overcurrent release Mechanical RESET for reclosing lockout Indicators Overcurrent release activated Graphical display Overload alarm COMMUNICATION EXPANDED Control keys for setting the release parameters Indicator cause of r
32. 1000 V A105 All other accessory parts must be ordered by specifying Z and the corresponding order code see Pages 5 37 to 5 43 This quantity or a multiple thereof can be ordered Siemens LV 30 2004 5 45 Circuit Breakers Non Automatic Circuit Breakers up to 6300 A SENTRON WL Accessories spare parts Designation DT Order No PS Weight per PU approx kg Electronic trip unit ETU and measurement function option with protection function Measurement function ETU15B LI without C 3WL9311 5AA00 0AA1 tunit on req ETU25B LSI without C 3WL9312 5AA00 0AA1 1 unit on req ETU27B LSING without C 3WL9312 7AA00 0AA1 1 unit on req ETU45B LSIN G without C 3WL9 314 5AA00 0AA1 1 unit on req without display with measurement func C 3WL9 314 5AA10 0AA1 1 unit on req with measurement func C 3WL9 314 5AA20 0AA1 1unit on req tion Plus ETU55B LSIN G without C 3WL9315 5AA00 0AA1 1 unit on req with measurement func C 3WL9 315 5AA10 0AA1 1unit on req with measurement func C 3WL9 315 5AA20 0AA1 1unit on req tion Plus ETU76B LSIN G without C 3WL9 317 6AA00 0AA1 1 unit on req with measurement func C 3WL9 317 6AA10 0AA1 1unit on req with measurement func C 3WL9 317 6AA20 0AA1 1unit on req tion Plus Rated current module rating plug Rated current J A For sizes Il 250 B 3WL9 111 0AA51 0AA0 1unit on req SUE 315 B 3WL9111 0AA5
33. 1250 A 1600 A 23 000 2000 A 35 000 2500 A 37 000 3200 A 37 000 Electronic Version V zn 0o v oa Version B azn 0 B functional Version C aznNg oc PN Version D aznN age 5 90 Basic functions with LCD display 1 D Basic functions and additional functions 2 7 D with LCD display Version E aznNg Basic functions with LCD display O E Basic functions and additional functions 2 7 E with LCD display Version H aznN Basic functions and additional functions 2 7 H Version J aznNg Basic functions and additional functions 2 im a Version N aznN Basic functions and additional functions 2 7 N Version P aznNg Basic functions and additional functions 2 7 P Circuit breakers also available with rated short time withstand current 11th to Tow 50 kA 1 s see Page 5 105 16th positions of the Order No see Page 5 104 1 Transformers for overload protection in the neutral conductor and trans formers for ground fault protection must be ordered separately see Page 5 108 2 A hand held device or the Win3WN6 software is required for operation This quantity or a multiple thereof can be ordered Siemens LV 30 2004 Circuit Breakers up to 3200 A Discontinued Series 4 pole fixed mounted design Version DT BS Weight per PU approx Rated operating voltage U up to AC 690 V 3WN6HNHE3 HEHEHE EEEE kg Size Size Rated current Adjustment range of rated current J setting current
34. 220 250 WWW WWW Ww ZAI ONMoO 380 415 Undervoltage release rc F8 can be delayed 0 2 to 3 2 s AC 50 60 Hz V DCV 110 127 4H 220 240 4K 380 415 4M 2nd auxiliary Without 2nd auxiliary release A release Shunt release f F2 AC 50 60 Hz V DC V 24 24 B 30 E 48 48 F 60 G 110 127 110 125 H 220 240 220 250 K Auxiliary switch 1st auxiliary switch block 2NO 2NC 1 tst 2nd auxiliary switch block 2NO 2NC 2CO 3 5th to 10th positions of the Order No see Pages 5 100 to 5 103 5 104 Siemens LV 30 2004 Circuit Breakers up to 3200 A Discontinued Series When ordering circuit breakers in the following versions Order Order No with Z Add Z to the complete Order No and code BWN6 eR LB Be indicate the appropriate order code s and additional order code s O Code for i Further versions Z CIT For fixed mounted and withdrawable circuit breakers Communication for electronic trip unit versions bus module D E F H J H N and P Fjo I Additionally required additional functions 2 interface DP 3WN6 3RK10 00 see Page 5 109 Measurement for electronic trip unit versions N and P The mea FIO 5 bus module surement module consists of the communication 2 and external voltage transformers see Page i I U module with additional measurement functions 9 cos 5 123 additionally required additional functions 2 interface
35. 3WL12 10 40038 1 uni 91 000 1250 1250 100 B 3WL12 12 4010138 1 uni 91 000 1600 1600 100 B 3WL12 16 40038 1 uni 91 000 2000 2000 100 B 3WL12 20 40038 1 uni 91 000 2500 2500 100 B 3WL12 25 40038 1 unit 102 000 3200 3200 100 B 3WL12 32 401038 1 unit 113 000 15 4000 4000 100 G 3WL13 40 40038 1 unit 148 000 Order No supplements Non automatic circuit breakers without electronic trip unit AA without electronic trip unit communication measurement function optional m AB Electronic trip units Design without ground fault protection ETU15B protection functions LI BB ETU25B protection functions LSI CB ETU45B protection functions LSIN EB ETU45B protection functions LSIN with 4 line display FB ETUS5B protection functions LSI D JB ETU76B protection functions LSIN with pixel graphics display NB Design with ground fault protection ETU27B protection functions LSING4 DG ETU45B protection functions LSING EG ETU45B protection functions LSING with 4 line display FG ETUS5S5B protection functions LSING JG ETU76B protection functions LSING with pixel graphics display NG Standard Order No supplements for further Order No supplements for circuit breakers and guide frames see Page 5 36 Manual operating mechanism with mechanical closing Without 15t and 2 auxiliary releases auxiliary switch 2 NC 2 NO 1AA2 Footnotes for pages 5 3
36. 3WL9251 1AA00 O0O0A 1 1 unit 25 000 1600 B 3WL9251 2AAO00 O00A 1 tunit 25 000 2000 B 3WL9 252 3AA00 ODA 1 unit 31 000 I 2500 B 3WL9252 4AAO00 O00A 1 1unit 39 000 l 3000 B 3WL9252 5AAO00 O00A 1 1unit 45 000 Il 4000 B 8WL9 253 6AAD0 ODA 1 1 unit 60 000 Front main circuit connection double hole 1000 B 8WL9 251 1ABO0 O0A 1 tunit 25 000 1600 B 3WL9 251 2ABO0 O0A 1 1unit 25 000 2000 B 3WL9 252 3ABO0 O0A 1 tunit 31 000 2500 B 3WL9252 4ABO0 O00A 1 1unit 39 000 3000 B 3WL9252 5ABO00 O00A 1 1 unit 45 000 l 4000 B 3WL9 253 6ABO0 O0A 1 1 unit 60 000 Horizontal main circuit connection 1000 B 3WL9251 1ACOO0O OOA 1 1unit 25 000 1600 B 3WL9251 2ACO0 OO0A 1 1unit 25 000 2000 B 3WL9 252 3ACO0 O0A 1 tunit 31 000 2500 B 3WL9252 4ACO0 OO0OA 1 1unit 39 000 3000 B 3WL9252 5ACO0 OO0OA 1 1unit 45 000 l 4000 B 3WL9253 6ACO0 OO0A 1 1 unit 60 000 5000 B 3WL9 253 7ACO0 ODA 1 1 unit 60 000 Vertical main circuit connection 1000 B 8WL9 251 1ADO0 O0A 1 1unit 25 000 1600 B 3WL9251 2AD00 O00A 1 1unit 25 000 2000 B 3WL9252 3ADO00 O00A 1 Muniti 31 000 2500 B 3WL9252 4AD00 O00A 1 1unit 39 000 3000 B 3WL9252 5ADO00 O00A 1 1unit 45 000 4000 B 3WL9 253 6ADO0 O0A 1 1unit 60 000 5000 B 3WL9 253 7ADO0O O0A 1 1unit 60 000 Main circuit connection connecting flange 1000 B 3WL9251 1AEO00 OO0A 1 1unit 25 000 1600 B 3WL9251 2AEO00 O0O0A 1 1unit 25 000 2000 B 3WL9252 3AEO00 O00A 1 1unit 31 000 2500 B 3WL9252 4AEO00 O00A 1 1unit 39 000 3200 B 3WL9252 5AEO00 O00A 1 1unit 45 000 l
37. 3WY36 21 0DA00 1 uni 5 300 3WN6 6 1 2500 A 3 pole 3 units B 3WY36 21 0EA00 1 uni 7 000 3WN6 6 3 2500 A 4 pole 4 units B 3WY36 21 OEA00 1 uni 7 000 3WN6 7 1 3200 A 3 pole 3 units B 3WY36 21 0FA00 1 uni 7 300 3WNG 7 3 3200 A 4 pole 4 units B 3WY36 21 0FA00 1 uni 7 300 Arc chute 3WN6 0 1 to 3WNG6 4 1 up to 1600 A 3 pole 3 units B 3WY36 11 O0CA00 1 uni 1 800 SWNE 0 3 to 83WN6 4 3 up to 1600 A 4 pole 4 units B 3WY36 11 O0CA00 1 uni 1 800 3WN6 5 1 to 3WN6 7 1 2000 3200 A 3 pole 3 units B 3WY36 11 OFA00 1 uni 2 500 3WN6 5 3 to 83WN6 7 3 2000 3200 A 4 pole 4 units B 3WY36 11 0FA00 1 uni 2 500 Crank handle For withdrawable circuit 1 set A 3WX36 84 0JA00 1set onreq breaker Main contact elements This quantity or a multiple thereof can be ordered Siemens LV 30 2004 5 115 Project planning aids E Characteristics The characteristics show the behavior of the electronic trip unit when it is activated by a current that is already flowing before the tripping operation If the overcurrent tripping occurs immediately after switch on and the electronic trip unit is therefore not yet en abled the opening time is extended depending on the level of time the overcurrent by approximately 3 to 10 ms In order to deter Tripping characteristics a and z z definite time delayed Opening time NSEO_01149 gadjustable as 2
38. 4000 B 3WL9 253 6AEO00 O00A 1 1 unit 60 000 Number of auxiliary supply connectors none 0 1 connector 1 2 connectors 2 3 connectors 3 4 connectors 4 For required number of auxiliary supply connectors see table on page 5 44 Type of auxiliary terminals without 0 with screw type terminals SIGUT 1 with screwless connection system 2 tension spring Position indicator switches without Option 1 1 connected position 1 changeover test position 1 changeover disconnected position 1 changeover Option 2 2 connected position 3 changeovers test position 2 changeovers disconnected position 1 changeover Shutters without A with shutter Size B 2 part Size Il lockable Size III All other accessory parts must be ordered by specifying Z and the corresponding order code see Page 5 39 This quantity or a multiple thereof can be ordered Siemens LV 30 2004 5 75 Circuit Breakers Approved acc to UL 489 up to 5000 A SENTRON WL Accessories spare parts Designation DT Order No PS Weight per PU approx kg with protection function ETU25B LSI C 3WL9 352 5AA00 0AA1 tunit on req ETU45B without measurement function LSIN G C 3WL9 354 5AA00 0AA1 1 unit on req ETU45B with measurement function LSIN G C 3WL9 354 5AA10 0AA1 1 unit on req Rated current module rating plug Rated current I A For size Il 250 B 3WL9 111 2AA51 0AA0 tunit on req 315 B 3WL9 111 2AA52 0AA0 tunit on req 400 B 3WL9 11
39. 4010135 1 uni 63 000 3200 3200 100 B 3WL12 32 4010135 1 uni 68 000 19 4000 4000 100 G 3WL13 40 40035 1 uni 88 000 19 5000 5000 100 G 3WL13 50 40035 1 uni 88 000 15 6300 6300 100 E 3WL13 63 40035 1 uni 96 000 With guide frame horizontal main circuit connection 800 800 100 B 3WL12 08 40036 1 uni 91 000 1000 1000 100 B 3WL12 10 40036 1 uni 91 000 1250 1250 100 B 3WL12 12 4010136 1 uni 91 000 1600 1600 100 B 3WL12 16 40036 1 uni 91 000 2000 2000 100 B 3WL12 20 4010136 1 uni 91 000 2500 2500 100 B 3WL12 25 4010136 1 unit 102 000 3200 3200 100 B 3WL12 32 40036 1 unit 113 000 1 4000 4000 100 3WL13 40 40036 1 unit 148 000 15 5000 5000 100 3WL13 50 40036 1 unit 148 000 With guide frame vertical main circuit connection 800 800 100 B 3WL12 08 401037 1 uni 91 000 1000 1000 100 B 3WL12 10 40037 1 uni 91 000 1250 1250 100 B 3WL12 12 401037 1 uni 91 000 1600 1600 100 B 3WL12 16 401037 1 uni 91 000 2000 2000 100 B 3WL12 20 401037 1 uni 91 000 2500 2500 100 B 3WL12 25 40037 1 unit 102 000 3200 3200 100 B 3WL12 32 40037 1 unit 113 000 1 4000 4000 100 iC 3WL13 40 40037 1 unit 148 000 15 5000 5000 100 3WL13 50 40037 1 unit 148 000 15 6300 6300 100 Cc 3WL13 63 401037 1 unit 166 000 With guide frame connecting flange 800 800 100 B 3WL12 08 40038 1 uni 91 000 1000 1000 100 B
40. 5 19 Size Il B 3WL9 111 0AA22 0AA0 1unit on req m Size III B 3WL9 111 0AA23 0AA0 1 unit on req ge l External transformers for neutral conductor Size B 3WL9 111 0AA31 0AA0 1 unit on req Ter e T5 see Page 5 19 Size Il B 3WL9 111 0AA32 0AA0 1unit on req BL with copper connection pieces Size III B 3WL9 111 0AA33 0AA0 1unit on req I Locking devices operator control elements a Sealable cover for ETU15B to ETU55B B 83WL9111 0AT45 0AA0 tunit on req Qo s for ETU76 B 3WL9 111 0AT46 0AA0 1unit on req 3WL9 111 0AT45 0AA0 Automatic reset of the ekout device B 3WL9 111 0AK01 0AA0 1 uni on req Remote reset solenoid _ DC 24 V B 3WL9 111 0AK03 0AA0 1unit on req for mechanical tripped indicator DC 48 V B 3WL9 111 0AK04 0AA0 1unit on req AC 120 V DC 125 V B 3WL9 111 0AK05 0AA0 1 unit on req ead AC 208 240 V B 3WL9 111 OAK06 0AA0 1unit on req 2 j DC 220 250 V 3 Retrofittable internal CubicleBUS wiring for con for ETU45B to B 3WL9 111 0AK30 0AA0 1unit on req nection to terminal X8 without male connector ETU76B ES Retrofittable internal wiring for connection of the D 3WL9 111 0AK31 0AA0 1unit on req fa NSEO_00999a 3WL9 111 OAKO OAAO external N and G transformers to terminal X8 without male connector 1 Required if communication is retrofitted 2 Can only be used in conjunction with automatic reset of lockout device Start of delivery March
41. 5 60 Siemens LV 30 2004 5 63 Circuit Breakers Non Automatic Circuit Breakers up to 6300 A SENTRON WL Project planning aids Size Il up to 3200 A withdrawable design 3 and 4 pole Standard design Optional connection variants Horizontal connection Front connection single 530 5 4 e490 3 NSE00643a S 90 90 a 40 gt 2 o n 13 5 E F ioc Em N2 99 rT L l 3 j vt NS i S Me C 9 i N i T y S q ele JIL Point 5 le 270 4010 tel e 350 55K gt P 451 t TEA i 480 55 A oO Front connection double hole to DIN 43673 g 62 5 8 8 a ral 9 z g h Z t qi 8 T ji an ay R e 4 a en ve
42. 60 A 3 J VW i SENTRON WL Project planning aids A 0 A U Circuit diagrams Terminal assignment diagram optional Interne Klemmen Externe Beschaltung Zubeh r Accessories Beschaltung Terminals External wiring Hilfsschalter S1 S2 Standard Internal wiring L L Auxiliary switch S1 S2 Standard NL Us 1 Uc X8 ny H z B Wandler im Transformator Fern Riicksetzmagnet j 1 _ Sternpunkt oder Summenstrom Remote reset bell alarm amp tripped indicator F7 gt 13 wandler 1200A 1A ma e g current transformer in the G Wandler G transformer S2 j gt 12 BODD star point of power transformer y p or a summation current G Wandler G transformer S1 ETU gt 11 transformer 1200 A MA N Wandler N sensor S2 D 10 N Br cke wenn kein N Wandler N Wandler N sensor S1 gt 9 Short terminals if no N sensor ext Spannungswandler Stern ext voltage transformer Com p 8 L1 ext Spannungswandler ext voltage transformer L3 i _ 7 D L2 ext Spannungswandler ext voltage transformer L2 1 E 6 D L3 ext Spannungswandler ext voltage transformer L1 4 m 5 N ovbDC i H 2 4 i 24 V DC input 24V DC i mhn 3 d CubicleBUS f m a Abschlusswiderstand i wenn kein externes CB modul CubicleBUS p 1 ede gt a Termination resistor if not external CB module sa T X7 te 1
43. B 3WL9 212 4ABO0 ODA 1 1 uni 39 000 B 3WL9 212 4BBO0 ODA 1 1 uni 47 000 l 3200 B 3WL9 212 5AB00 O0A 1 1 uni 45 000 B 3WL9 212 5BBO0 ODA 1 1 uni 54 000 Ill 4000 B 3WL9 213 6ABO0 O0A 1 1 uni 60 000 B 3WL9 213 6BBO0 ODA 1 1 uni 84 000 Horizontal main circuit connection 1000 B 3WL9 211 1ACOO ODA 1 1 uni 25 000 B 3WL9 211 1BCOO ODA 1 1 uni 30 000 l 1600 B 3WL9 211 2ACOO ODA 1 1 uni 25 000 B 3WL9 211 2BCOO ODA 1 1 uni 30 000 l 2000 B 3WL9 212 3ACOO OOA 1 1 uni 31 000 B 3WL9 212 3BCOO0O OOA 1 1 uni 37 000 l 2500 B 3WL9 212 4ACOO ODA 1 1 uni 39 000 B 3WL9 212 4BCO0O OA 1 1 uni 47 000 l 3200 B 3WL9 212 5ACOO ODA 1 1 uni 45 000 B 3WL9 212 5BCOO ODA 1 1 uni 54 000 Ill 4000 B 3WL9 213 6ACOO ODA 1 1 uni 60 000 B 3WL9 213 6BCO0 ODA 1 1 uni 84 000 Il 5000 B 3WL9 213 7ACOO ODA 1 1 uni 60 000 B 3WL9 213 7BCOO ODA 1 1 uni 84 000 Vertical main circuit connection l 1000 B 8WL9 211 1ADO0 O0A 1 tunit 25 000 B 83WL9211 1BDO0 O0A 1 1 unit 30 000 l 1600 B 3WL9211 2AD00 O00A 1 tunit 25 000 B 3WL9 211 2BD00 O00A 1 1 unit 30 000 2000 B 3WL9 212 3ADO0 O0A 1 tunit 31 000 B 3WL9212 3BDUO0 O0A 1 1 unit 37 000 2500 B 3WL9 212 4ADO0 O0A 1 tunit 39 000 B 3WL9212 4BDO0 O0A 1 1unit 47 000 3200 B 3WL9 212 5ADO0 O0A 1 tunit 45 000 B 3WL9212 5BDO0 O0A 1 1unit 54 000 Ul 4000 B 8WL9 213 6ADO0 O0A 1 tunit 60 000 B 3WL9213 6BDUO0 O0A 1 unit 84 000 Hl 5000 B 3WL9 213 7ADO0O ODA 1 tunit 60 000 B 83WL9213 7BDO0 O0A 1 1 unit 84 000 II 6300 B 3WL9213 8ADO00 O00A 1 tu
44. DP 3WN6 3RK10 00 see Page 5 109 Automatic mechanical reset of the lockout device after overcurrent tripping Kio 1 Rated short time Rated current of the circuit breaker KIO 3 withstand 630 A current Ipy 800 A 50 kA 1 s 1000 A at AC 50 60 Hz see Technical specifica 3 pole circuit breaker tions on Page 5 96 4 pole circuit breaker Tripped signaling switch gt 1 CO instead of 1 NO 1 NO standard Klol7 C111 With 5 digit f operating cycles counter C10 1 C11 Motor switch on only in the case of circuit breakers with Pe operator panel motor manual operating mechanism with si I 3 TEN stored energy feature S9 With locking with 3SB1 Made by CES Sol device safety lock Normal lock No SSG 10 for the actuating instead of the button or OFF button MEOE DEON 360012 K1 Sols CECI EMERGENCY key removable STOP button in OFF position Special closure with locking device S20 see Accessories for max 4 padlocks Page 5 112 shackle diameter 4 8 mm with EMERGENCY STOP button self latching S12 instead of the OFF button with 3SB1 Made by CES Sjol5 safety lock Normal lock no SSG 10 instead of the Made by IKON D Normal lock no 360012 K1 Siol7 AO ON button with sealing cap key removable in non actuated position Mounting set for FORTRESS lock S14 Interlock to be obtained from the manufactur
45. EAE and additional order code s OOO Code for further versions Z 1 1 1 A0 OT AIO Size Size Il Size III Rated current J A Only one module is possible per x x z 250 Blo 2 Circuit breaker not in conjunction with electronic trip i 215 Blo 3 unit ETU15B x x 400 Bl oOl4 As standard the overcurrent x x 500 BIO 5 releases are equipped with a rated current module x x 630 BIOl6 The supplied rated current module is x x 800 Bios equal to the max rated circuit z breaker current x x 1000 BAIO mam x x x 1250 B12 x x x 1600 BI 116 x x 2000 B20 x x 2500 B25 x x 3200 BI3 2 x 4000 B40 x 5000 BIS 0 x 6300 B613 Indication operator control elements door sealing frame 5 digit mechanical Con gt Clo operating cycles counter Electrical ON button Button with sealing cap C11 in the operator control panel LLLI only possible with circuit breakers ney operauon wih sauna el 2 with closing solenoid Key operation with lock IKON KAEI Storage status 1 NO contact C20 signaling switch S21 BER Ready to close signaling switch 1 NO contact C2IR S20 Signaling switch for the first auxiliary release S22 C26 coo for the second auxiliary release
46. III circuit breakers are not available with electronic trip unit design capacity Jem for non automatic circuit breakers see Page 5 20 ETU15B 3 Required accessories PROFIBUS communication setup or Measurement 6 ETU45B to ETU76B with ground fault protection module GFM AT alarm function Plus Order No with Z and order code FO2 or F05 respec and tripping see Page 5 46 tively see Page 5 38 E Start of delivery on request This quantity or a multiple thereof can be ordered Siemens LV 30 2004 5 35 Circuit Breakers Non Automatic Circuit Breakers up to 6300 A SENTRON WL H selection and ordering data Order No supplement 3WL1 H i Operating mechanism Manual operating mechanism with mechanical closing q Manual operating mechanism with mechanical and electrical closing closing solenoid suitable for continuous duty 100 ON time Closing solenoid AC 50 60 Hz V_ DC V 110 110 2 230 220 3 Manual motorized operating mechanism with mechanical and electrical closing closing solenoid suitable for continuous duty 100 ON time Motor Closing solenoid AC 50 60 Hz V _ DC V AC 50 60 Hz V DC V 208 240 220 250 230 220 4 110 127 110 125 110 110 5 24 24 6 To order different voltages for motorized operating mechanism and closing solenoid 1 at the 13th digit of the Order No and order codes see Page 5 38 1st auxiliary release Without 1st auxiliary release A Shunt release suitable
47. Il fixed mounted design 440 75 690 750 1000 180 Size Il withdrawable design without arc chute cover 440 50 690 50 1000 100 Size Il withdrawable design with arc chute cover 440 0 690 0 Size Ill fixed mounted design 440 750 690 750 1000 180 Size Ill withdrawable design without arc chute cover 440 50 690 500 1000 100 Size Ill withdrawable design with arc chute cover 440 0 690 0 5 60 Siemens LV 30 2004 lateral each mm 0 0 oo 02 0 ooo 02 0 ooo 02 02 behind mm 0 0 Coo oo Coo Coo oo Coo Coo Protection cover IP55 444 rs 330 Safety distances to live parts Nominal rated voltage above V AC auxiliary connector mm Size I fixed mounted design 440 150 690 300 Size I withdrawable design without arc chute cover 440 150 690 300 Size I withdrawable design with arc chute cover 440 14 690 14 Size Il fixed mounted design 440 250 690 600 1000 430 Size Il withdrawable design without arc chute cover 440 250 690 600 1000 350 Size Il withdrawable design with arc chute cover 440 14 690 14 Size Ill fixed mounted design 440 75 690 500 1000 430 Size Ill withdrawable design without arc chute cover 440 50 690 500 1000 350 Size Ill withdrawable design with arc chute cover 440 14 690 14 1 Value for plate O mm for strut und grid pattern NSE0_01030a Circuit breaker
48. Interface DP 3WN6 Required once for each communication 1 uni A 3RK10 00 0JC80 0BA2 1 unit 0 563 capable circuit breaker PROFIBUS connector For connecting the interface to 1 uni X 6ES7 972 0BB41 0XA0 1 unit 0 051 PROFIBUS DP Power supply DC 24 V For interface DP 3WN6 1 uni e g 4AV21 02 2EB00 0A 24V Current input max 800 A see Catalog LV10 Con including electronic trip unit of trolgear and switchgear for the circuit breaker industry section 13 SIDAC S power supplies System manual Communication interface of the 1 unit x E20001 P285 A644 V1 unit on req 3VF 3WN6 3WN1 3WS1 circuit breakers with PROFIBUS DP Software module Recommended for SIMATIC S5 and S7 1 unit A 3RK18 00 0AA00 0AA0 1 unit 0 106 programming aid for handling communi cation 3 5 floppy disks Hand held device For parameterization operation and 1 unit A 3WX36 47 6JA00 1 unit 1 300 monitoring for 3WN6 circuit breakers with electronic trip unit D E F H J K N P Line adapter for 3WX36 47 6JA00 1 unit A 3WX36 47 6JA01 1 unit 1 300 hand held device required Power supply unit is required if the 1 unit A 3WX36 47 6JA02 1 unit 1 300 3WN6 circuit breaker does not have an additional DC 24 V supply of co A Designation Rated current Size Number Order For 1 set of poles quantity Order No For fixed mounted circuit breakers Support bracket 1 se B 3WX36 81 0JA00 1 se 4 800 including screws for attaching
49. NC or S8 NO O E a 3 4 Motorantrieb Charging motor 5 M 2 L L UIU opt Motorabstellschalter opt motor main switch 12 g OC E 1 Niji A e Z faa Siemens LV 30 2004 Circuit Breakers Approved acc to UL 489 up to 5000 A SENTRON WL General data Technical specifications Short circuit breaking capacity Size l Il Ill Type 3WL51 3WL52 3WL53 Switching capacity class S H H up to AC 480 V kA 65 100 100 up to AC 600 V Y 347 V kA 50 85 up to AC 600 V kA 85 Rated short time withstand current Size l Il Ill Type 3WL51 3WL52 3WL53 Switching capacity class S H H at max delay time t q 0 4 s kA 65 85 85 Further technical specifications Size l Il Type 3WL51 10 3WL51 16 3WL52 20 Rated current at 40 C at 50 60 Hz Main conductor A up to 1000 1600 2000 Rated voltage U at 50 60 Hz ACV 600 Y 347 600 Y 347 600 Ambient temperature of the system C 25 40 25 40 25 40 Power loss at rated current with AC symmetrical load Fixed mounted circuit breaker W 100 150 180 Withdrawable circuit breaker W 195 350 320 Operating times Make time ms 35 35 35 Break time ms 38 38 34 Electr make time via activation solenoid ms 80 80 100 Electr break time via shunt release ms 73 73 13 Electr break time instantaneous undervoltage release ms 73 73 73 Break time due to ETU instantaneous short circuit release ms 50 50 50 Service life mechanic
50. Order No PS Weight per PU approx kg Indicators operator control elements Ready to close indicator switch B 3WL9111 OAHO1 0OAAO junit on req Signaling switch First or second auxiliary B 3WL9111 OAHO2 0AAO junit on req releases Tripped signaling switch 5 B 3WL9 111 0AH04 0AA0 junit on req Operating cycles counter mechanical B 3WL9111 OAHO7 0AAO junit on req Stored energy status signaling switch4 5 B 3WL9 111 0AH08 0AA0Q junit on req Position indicator switch for guide frames tst block 3 microswitches B 3WL9 111 0AH11 0AA0 unit on req NSE0_00993a 2nd block 6 microswitches B 3WL9111 0AH12 0OAA0 junit on req 3WL9 111 0AH01 0AA0 Electrical ON button button wiring with sealing cap B 3WL9 111 0AJ02 0AA0 1 unit on req with CES mounting set B 3WL9 111 0AJ03 0AA0 junit on req with BKS mounting set B 3WL9111 0AJ04 0AA0 junit on req with IKON mounting set B 3WL9111 0AJ05 0OAAO junit on req Motor shutdown switch B 3WL9 111 0AJ06 0AAO junit on req mounting on operator control panel EMERGENCY STOP button B 3WL9 111 0BA72 0AA0 1 unit on req Mushroom head pushbutton instead of the mechanical OFF button Manual test device for electronic trip unit ETU15B to ETU76B B 3WL9 111 0AT31 0AA0 junit on req For testing the overcurrent tripping functions H02 0AA0 Capacitor store unit Capacitor store unit Rated control supply voltage for shunt release rated operating voltage Storage time 5 min AC 50 60 H
51. RIZO wy two part 2000 3200 A CH Mutual mechani Interlock module with a Bowden wire RI5 3 Clo cal interlock for 2 m when interlocking three circuit breakers an 3WN6 circuit additional Bowden wire is required see Page breaker 5 112 Locking device with safety lock Made by CES RI6 1 consisting of lock Normal lock No SSG 10 in the cabinet door ade by IKON RIB CEG and interlock mod Normal lock no 360012 K1 ule with Bowden wire 1 5 m to pre Mounting set for CASTELL lock R 6l5 vent unauthorized Interlock to be obtained from the lock manufacturer closing of the cir CASTELL lock FS 2 CO cuit breaker active Mounting set for FORTRESS lock R614 in connected posi Interlock to be obtained from the lock manufacturer fon FORTRESS lock H31LH AC 65 standard Locking with safety lock Made by CES RIBO device Normal lock no SSG 10 9 provet moves ade by IKON RIBI ment of the with Normal lock no 360012 K1 drawable circuit CLT breaker out of the ade by Profalux R815 disconnected posi ton ade by Ronis IRI8 6 Blocking device to prevent opening of the cabinet door RIBO when circuit breaker is in connected position to prevent closing with the cabinet door open R40 CLL only active in connected position to prevent movement with the cabinet door open R 5 0 active in disconnected test and connected posi tion Arc chute up to 1600A Size RI3I5 3 cover 2000 3200 A Size Il BIE CIT a g 1 Required for protecti
52. Rear versions of the horizontal terminals with guide rails guide frame up to 1000 A 27 000 see Page 5 110 1250 A 1600 A 28 000 2000 A 46 000 2500 A 48 000 3200 A 48 000 Electronic Version V zn 0 v ae Version B azn 0 B functional Version G aznNg 0 G BENS Version D aznN age Basic functions with LCD display 1 Basic functions and additional functions 2 7 with LCD display Version E aznNg Basic functions with LCD display 7 E Basic functions and additional functions 2 7 E with LCD display Version F aznNg Basic functions with LCD display O amp Basic functions and additional functions 2 7 F with LCD display Version H aznN 4 Basic functions and additional functions 2 7 H Version J aznNg Basic functions and additional functions 2 7 J Version K aznNg 4 Basic functions and additional functions 2 7 K Version N aznN Basic functions and additional functions 2 7 N Version P aznNg Basic functions and additional functions 2 7 P Circuit breakers also available with rated short time withstand current 11th to Tow 50 kA 1 s see Page 5 105 16th positions of the Order No see Page 5 104 1 4th transformer is already fitted in the neutral conductor of the circuit breaker 2 Transformers for overload protection in the neutral conductor and trans formers for ground fault protection must be ordered separately see Page 5 108 3 The current transformer mounted in the star poin
53. S23 Cl2 7 Motor shutdown switch on the S2 J gt operator control panel CLO EMERGENCY STOP button Mushroom head pushbutton instead of S2 ip Coo the mechanical OFF button Door sealing frame ma fe CEA Neutral conductor transformer Internal transformer Size E23 for neutral conductor ETU with N conductor protection Size ll mmn required Size III Overload and short circuit Only possible with 4 pole circuit breakers F 3 protection of neutral conductor as for one pole load only with ETU27B ETU45B ETU55B or ETU76B with internal transformer for neutral conductor Delivery as of July 2004 CO 1 Only possible with motorized operating mechanism 2 Not possible with PROFIBUS communication interface option order code F02 3 Only for circuit breakers with motorized operating mechanism not possi ble with order codes C11 C12 C14 4 If ordering withdrawable circuit breaker and guide frame separately specify order code A05 for withdrawable circuit breaker and guide frame x available not available Siemens LV 30 2004 Circuit Breakers Non Automatic Circuit Breakers up to 6300 A SENTRON WL Add Z to the complete Order No and Order Order No with Z indicate the appropriate order code s code awe 4807 8 900 112 19141016 and additional order code s DOD ea a x Code for Lockout device and remote reset Further versions Z Automat
54. UE DC 60 V DC 110 V DC 220 V Power input to motor AC DC VA W 110 110 Time required to charge the stored energy mechanism at 1 x Us s Bae Closing solenoid For data see above For motor and Short circuit protection 2 A TDz time lag 1 A closing solenoid Motor and closing solenoid for the same rated control supply voltages Smallest permissible DIAZED fuse operational class gL at Us 24 30 V 2A miniature circuit breaker with C characteristic for different at Us 48 60 V 2A rated control supply voltages at Us 110 127 V 1A at U 220 250 V 1A Electronic trip unit signals Measuring accuracy of the electronic trip unit Protection functions to EN 60947 current indication lt 5 measurement functions base quantities lt 1 measurement functions derived quantities lt 4 Auxiliary releases shunt release ST For continuous command Operating value pickup gt 0 7 x U F1 F2 100 ON time circuit breaker is tripped locks out on momentary i contact commands Operating range MEI an ell Se WA Extended operating range for DC 24 V DC 48 V Oh oa ere for battery operation DC 60 V DC 110 V DC 220 V Rated control supply voltage Us AC 50 60 Hz V 110 230 DC V 24 30 48 60 110 220 Power input AC DC VAW 15 15 Minimum command duration at Us ms 60 Opening time of circuit breaker AC DC ms 80 at Us 100 Short circuit protection 1 A TDz time lag 1 A Smallest permissible DIAZED fuse operational class gL miniature circuit break
55. alarm Ground fault module GFM A 45B Selector for earth fault detection Earth fault alarm Earth fault tripped Indicators GFM AT 45B Rotary switch ZI for setting in TRIP ALARM ALARM fai value g earth fault E protection LS TRIP Rotary switch for setting value earth fault protection delay NSEO_00962 Rotary switch for setting value earth fault alarm t t g g Ground fault module GFM AT 45B pee Indicator noting Earth fault transfer m Ez GFM A 55B 76B arm earth fault _ detection ALARM ALARM Field for Fields for noting setting values noting setting values Ground fault module GFM A 55B 76B Indicators Earth fault Field for noting alarm transfer USC eo th fault earth fault tripped detection ALARM Fields for Fields for NSE0 00964 noting setting values Ground fault module GFM AT 55B 76B Circuit Breakers Non Automatic Circuit Breakers up to 6300 A Measurement method Vectorial summation current formation The N conductor current and the three phase currents are mea sured directly The electronic overcurrent trip unit determines the ground fault current by means of vectorial summation current formation for the three phase currents and the N conductor current Direct measurement of the ground fault current A current transformer with the transformation ratio 1200 A 1A is used for measurement of the ground fault current The trans fo
56. breaker in accordance with the installation instructions Designation Rated current Size Number of poles Required order DT For 1 set PS Weight quantity per or 1 unit per PU circuit breaker approx kg For fixed mounted circuit breakers ww SA Connecting bars up to 1000 A 3 and 4 pole 1 unit A 3WX36 21 1AA00 1 unit on req Sfl for front accessible s ojj connection 1250 and 1600 A 3 and 4 pole 1 unit A 3WX3621 1BA00 1 unit on req 2 F Vertical single hole bar gt Zz 2000 A 3 and 4 pole 1 unit A 3WX36 21 1DA00 Tunit on req 2500 and 3200 A Il 3 and 4 pole 1 unit A 3WX36 21 1FA00 1 unit on req Vertical double hole bar up to 1000 A 3 and 4 pole 1 unit A 3WX36 21 1AA01 1 unit on req holes to DIN 43673 a il a 1250 and 1600 A 3 and 4 pole 1 unit A 3WX36 21 1BA01 1 unit on req of 19 He o o o s 2000 A 3 and 4 pole 1 unit A 3WX36 21 1DA01 1 unit on req He os fy 2 2500 and 3200 A Il 3 and 4 pole 1 unit A 3WX36 21 1FA01 1 unit on req Locking device consist with safety lock Made by CES 1 set A 3WX36 68 1JA00 1set on req ing of lock in the cabi Normal lock no SSG 10 net door and interlock Made by BKS A 3WX3668 1JB00 1set on req module with Bowden Normal lock no S1 wire 1 5 m to prevent unauthorized closing of Made by IKON A 3WX36 68 1JC00 1 se on req the circuit breaker Normal lock no 360012 K1 Made by O M R A 3WX36 68 1JD00 1 set
57. class tp at I4t Thermal image can be switched on off Phase loss sensitivity at ta 20 ms M at ta 20 ms M Neutral conductor protection v Function can be switched on off v N conductor setting range Iy In X 1 Short time delayed short circuit protection v v Function can be switched on off Setting range Isg n X 1 25 1 5 2 2 5 3 4 6 8 10 12 1 25 1 5 2 2 5 3 4 6 8 10 12 Setting range for delay time tsa 0 M 100 200 300 400 0 M 100 200 300 400 Switchable short time delayed short circuit protection I tdependent function Setting range for delay time t g at 7t Zone Selective Interlocking function Instantaneous short circuit protection v v v Function can be switched on off Setting range J Ip x 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 fixed for J 2 20 x In max 50 kA _ fixed for Jj 2 20 x In max 50 kA Ground fault protection v fixed mounting Tripping and alarm function Tripping function can be switched on off Alarm function can be switched on off Detection of the ground fault current via summation cur rent formation with internal or external neutral conductor transformer Detection of ground fault current via external transformer Setting range of the operating current J g for release A B C D E Setting range of the operating current Jg for alarm Setting range of the delay time ty 100 200 300 400 500 ms Switchable grou
58. close indicator 16 Switch position indication Tripped indicator reset button Secure OFF locking device option Operator panel Male connector for auxiliary connections Guide frame Arc chute cover option Blow out openings Opening for crane hook Shutter option Locking device shutter option ame plate for guide frame Isolating contacts Ground terminal 14 mm Locking device for racking rail Locking device against movement when cabinet door is open option Door interlock for guide frame option Racking rail Factory set rated current coding Sliding contact for breaker grounding option Equipment dependent coding option Shutter actuator option Position indication switch option Sliding contact module for auxiliary con ductors number depends on equipment 000080 10 NSE0_00966a 5 8 Siemens LV 30 2004 Circuit Breakers Non Automatic Circuit Breakers up to 6300 A Auxiliary releases Up to two auxiliary releases can be installed at the same time The following are available 1 shunt release or 1 undervoltage release or 2 shunt releases or 1 shunt release 1 undervoltage release Shunt release When the operating voltage is connected to the shunt release the circuit breaker is opened immediately The shunt release is available in the variants 5 ON time for overe
59. closing The operating mechanisms with electrical closing can be used for synchronization tasks Siemens LV 30 2004 5 5 Circuit Breakers Non Automatic Circuit Breakers up to 6300 A SENTRON WL e Yal ye ELE Circuit breaker Breaking capacity Dimensions max rated current Zn max A Teu at 440 V AC kA or Fixed mounted Draw out Icc at 300 V DC kA 3 4 pole 3 4 pole BR g00 704 914 704 914 Width i C u 434 434 460 460 Height o 100 291 291 385 385 Depth o 2500 460 590 460 590 Width Hit X 4 434 I 434 460 460 Height ay a en 30 55 80 100 800 291 291 385 385 Depth 800 320 410 320 410 Width g N fs 434 434 460 460 Height ao 50 65 291 291 385 385 Depth NSE0_00887 i The dimension for the depth of the circuit breaker is from the circuit breaker rear to the inner surface of the closed switchgear door 1 Size Il Z cu 55 kA deliverable for In max 2000 A and 2500 A Overview of SENTRON WL circuit breakers non automatic circuit breakers Main circuit connections All circuit breakers are equipped with horizontal main circuit connections on the rear for up to 5000 A as standard horizontal connection to busbars lt a o S Circuit breakers with a max rated current of 6300 A are 3 i 3 E equipped with vertical main circuit connections for vertically 2 Z g installed busbars F 3 F Horizontal Front connection with single Vertical The following
60. for continuous duty 100 ON time AC 50 60 Hz V DC V 24 B 30 c 48 D 60 E 110 110 F 230 220 G 2nd auxiliary release Without 2nd auxiliary release A Shunt release suitable for continuous duty 100 ON time AC 50 60 Hz V DC V 24 B 30 Cc 48 D 60 E 110 110 F 230 220 G Undervoltage release instantaneous lt 80 ms short time delay lt 200 ms AC 50 60 Hz V DC V 24 J 30 K 48 L 110 127 110 125 M 208 240 220 250 N 380 415 P Undervoltage release can be delayed between 0 2 s and 3 2 s AC 50 60 Hz V DC V 48 Q 110 127 110 125 R 208 240 220 250 S 380 415 T Auxiliary switches tst auxiliary switch block 2 NO 2NC tst 2nd auxiliary switch block 4NO 4NC 6 NO 2NC 5NO 3NC 5 36 Siemens LV 30 2004 ONA Circuit Breakers Non Automatic Circuit Breakers up to 6300 A SENTRON WL Add Z to the complete Order No and indicate the appropriate order code s Operator s Guide Printed version version on CD ROM included in the scope of supply of the circuit breaker German English French ltalian Spanish Portuguese Rated voltage AC DC 1000 V Only for circuit breakers with high switching capacity 8th digit of the Order No is a 4 Size 11 up to 2000 A up to 2500 A up to 3200 A up to 4000 A up to 5000 A up to 6300 A Size IlI Rated current module rating plug Order Order No with Z code OWL pe See eee
61. frames can be retrofit ted with an equipment dependent coding unit This allows different designs of circuit breakers and guide frames to be uniquely assigned If the circuit breaker and guide frame have been assigned different codes the circuit breaker cannot be inserted 36 different coding options can be selected Position indicator switch for guide frames The guide frame can be retrofitted with position indicator switches These can be used to determine the position of the cir cuit breaker in the guide frame The position indicator switches have factory fitted 1 5 m long ca bles and are mounted on the supporting plate Two versions are available see table below Circuit Breakers Non Automatic Circuit Breakers up to 6300 A Positions of the withdrawable circuit breaker in the guide frame SENTRON WL General data Display Position indicator Main circuit Auxiliary circuit Control cabinet door Shutter Maintenance position a disconnected disconnected open closed pi 7 2 p aye B oA ES 4 NSE01033 NSEO1037 Disconnected position a conec disconnected disconnected closed closed 3 him m NSE01034 NSE01038 Test position T disconnected connected closed closed Fl Li rsr NSE01035 a NSE01039 Connected position T
62. front and DIN connecting bars 3 pole for 3 bars Size 3WL9 111 0AN41 0AA0 junit on req vuv oou vvv uv Ww B Size II B 3WL9 111 0AN42 0AA0 tunit on req Size III B 3WL9 111 0AN43 0AA0 tunit on req H L o 4 pole for 4 bars Size B 3WL9 111 0AN44 0AA0 1unit on req Size II B 3WL9 111 0AN45 0AA0 tunit on req Size III B 3WL9111 0AN46 0AAO tunit on req Rear Size I up to 1000 A B 3WL9111 0AN15 OAAO junit on req o oo vertical A Size 1250 A 1600 A B 3WL9111 0AN16 0AAO tunit on req main circuit connections 2 20 Size II up to 2000 A B 3WL9111 0AN17 0AAO unit on req MA Size Il up to 2500 A B 3WL9111 0AN18 0AA0 1unit on req 3WL9 111 0AN41 0AAO Size II up to 3200 A B 3WL9111 0AN21 0AAO tunit on req Size III up to 5000 A B 3WL9 111 0AN22 0AA0 tunit on req Size Ill up to 6300 A 3 busbar connec B 3WL9 111 0AN23 0AA0 1 unit on req A tion pieces for 3 pole circuit breakers Ba Size Ill up to 6300 A 4 busbar connec B 3WL9 111 0AN20 0AA0 1 unit on req NSE 01015 tion pieces for 4 pole circuit breakers 3WL9 111 OAN23 0AA0 Size Ill up to 6300 A 4 busbar connec B 3WL9 111 0AN10 0AA0 1 unit on req tion pieces for 4 pole circuit breakers Rear Size up to 1000 A B 3WL9 111 0AN32 0AAO0 junit on req horizontal Size 1250 A 1600 A B 3WL9 111 0AN33 0AA0 1unit on req circuit connections Size II up to 2000 A B 3WL9 111 0AN34 0AA0 tunit on req Size Il up to 2500 A B 3WL
63. ms 60 ms Circuit Breakers Non Automatic Circuit Breakers up to 6300 A SENTRON WL Project planning aids Dimension drawings Voltage transformer for SENTRON WL External transformer for neutral conductors without copper rag ene with measurement function and measurement function Plus connection pieces on Size I 3WL9 111 0AA21 0AAO i 7 60 R 13 1 H Oy i f T Y Ne o 5 oe D 5 NSE0_01103a R22 4 a o 34 For mounting on Lo 1 a 35 mm standard 18 51 mounting rail 3 Current transformers for lx 83 overload protection in the neutral conductor Size Il 3WL9 111 0AA22 0AA0 External transformer for neutral conductors with copper r connection pieces or Size I 3WL9 111 0AA31 0AAO 2 g wo 15 41 S a g es 88 l be 51 95 o he 113 3 l a L55 e 83 Size Il 3WL9 111 0AA32 0AA0 i A 30 30 j 3x10 460 je 51 gt T 50 5 184 la 97 NSE0_00606a a 45 a a m 107 m 123 NSEO_01377 4 Door cutout for operator s panel 13 5 mon ro Door cutout with edge protection 295 Cutout after mounting of 8 IF OOO tf 7 edge protection e 131 _ 3x10 52 gt NSE0_00164b
64. not selected 1 d3 2nd auxiliary release shunt release f F2 required if b2 or b3 is not selected 1 e Auxiliary switches ea 1st auxiliary switch block 2 NO 2 NC 0 e2 tst and 2nd auxiliary switch block 2 NO 2 NC 2 CO required if b2 or b3 or d3 is not 1 selected f Communication module or measurement module fi without communication module and without measurement module 0 f2 with communication module or measurement module required if c2 or c3 or c4 is not selected 2 g Tripped signaling switch S22 and ready to close signaling switch floating gi with tripped signaling switch S22 and ready to close signaling switch floating 2 required if c2 or c3 or c4 or f2 is not selected h Total number of auxiliary supply connectors maximum of 4 5 110 Siemens LV 30 2004 This quantity or a multiple thereof can be ordered Circuit Breakers up to 3200 A Discontinued Series When retrofitting the circuit breaker Order No must Accessories spare parts be added to the name plate on the operator panel and to the side wall of the circuit breaker in accordance with the installation instructions Designation Required DT For1 set Boe Weight order quan or 1 unit per PU tity per cir approx cuit breaker kg For fixed mounted and withdrawable circuit breakers Sealing cap over OFF or ON button to prevent unauthorized opening or 1 unit A 3WX36 63 1JK00 1 u
65. req for withdrawable circuit breakers Made by IKON B 3WL9 111 0BA53 0AA0 1 unit on req Disconnector unit E Made by KIRK Key B 3WL9 111 0BA57 0AA0 junit on req meets requirements for main circuit breakers Made by Ronis B 3WL9111 OBA58 0AAO 1 unit on req to EN 60204 VDE 0113 Made by Profalux B 3WL9 111 0BA50 0AA0 junit on req consisting of lock in the cabinet door active in connected position function is retained when circuit breaker is replaced Locking device for B 3WL9 111 0BA71 0AA0 junit on req operating mechanism handle with padlock Locking device to prevent Made by CES B 3WL9111 0BA73 0AAO 1 unit on req movement of the withdrawable circuit breaker Made by IKON B 3WL9 111 0BA75 0AA0 junit on req Safety lock for mounting on Made by Profalux B 3WL9111 OBA76 0AAO junit on req the circuit breaker Made by Ronis B 3WL9111 0BA77 0AAO junit on req E Made by KIRK Key B 3WL9111 OBA80 0AAO junit on req Locking devices to prevent movement of the withdrawable Made by CES B 3WL9 111 0BA81 0AA0 junit on req circuit breaker in disconnected position Made by IKON B 3WL9 111 0BA83 0AA0 unit on req consisting of Bowden wire and lock Made by Profalux B 3WL9 111 0BA85 0AA0 junit on req in the cabinet door Made by Ronis B 3WL9 111 0BA86 0AA0 junit on req Mounting set for padlocks B 3WL9111 0BA87 0AAO 1 unit on req to prevent opening of the cabinet door in ON Fixed mounted version B 3WL9 111 0BB12 0AA0 unit on req position can be defe
66. rotor operating voltage U V 2000 Power loss at Zp Fixed mounted cir br W 40 90 140 170 260 420 with 3 phase symmetr load Withdrawable circuit w 80 205 310 310 510 760 without line ide busbars and metal breaker including components guide frame Service life with maintenance mechanical Op 20000 20000 electrical cycles 20000 20000 without maintenance mechanical Op 10000 10000 electrical cycles 6000 2000 Operating frequency 1 min 1 Minimum interval ms 80 between tripping operation by electronic trip unit and next making operation of the circuit breaker only with automatic mechanical resetting of the lockout device Service position 30 30 30 30 and Z or NSEO_00061 NSEO_00062 Degree of protection Circuit breaker IP20 when fitted in cabinet or frame Operator panel with door sealing frame IP54 Main conductor Copper bars bare Qty 1 x 2x 2x 2x 3x 3x minimum cross sections mm 50 x 10 40 x 10 60 x 10 100 x 10 100 x 10 100 x 10 Copper bars painted black Qty 1 x 1x 2x 2x 2x 3x mm 40 x 10 60 x 10 50 x 10 80 x 10 100 x 10 100 x 10 Auxiliary conductors Cu Max no of solid and 1 x 0 5 2 5mm 1 x AWG 14 aux conduc finely stranded with 2x1 0mm tors x cross end sleeves section Weights 3 pole Fixed mounted circuit breaker 34 34 36 57 59 61 circuit approx kg breakers withdrawable circuit breaker 36 36 38 59 61 63 approx kg Guide frame approx kg 22 22 23 35 37 37 4 pole Fixed mounted circui
67. s ANSEO_01151 60 A s NSE0_01152 30 2000 min 2000 20 1000 20 1000 10 500 10 500 5 5 I adjustable as 200 200 multiples of 7 2 100 2 100 50 il ata 0 3x 0 5x 20 20 0 2x 0 4x 0 6 5 5 2 2 1 1 tg ms 0 5 0 5 500 300 0 2 02 200 Q1 0 1 100 0 05 0 05 0 02 0 01 one 0 005 se i 0 005 1 2 4 6 810 20 40 60 100 200x 21 Giren a 01 02 0406 1 2 aG 1 Asse Tripping characteristics of electronic trip units versions B and C G I Transformer primary rated current Instantaneous short circuit release n I 5 116 Operating current permanently set Siemens LV 30 2004 Si Tripping characteristics of electronic trip u I Transformer primary rated current ua Ground fault release g I Operating current adjustable tg Delay time adjustable Current gt nits version C G Dimension drawings 3WN6 fixed mounted circuit breakers 3 pole Horizontal connection 470 SA2 5315a je 40 330 _ SA2 5316a j o SA2 5318a SA2 531 9a 2 E aE Front connection SA2 5321a 11 m e nc Fixing holes for support bracket ernim a 400 455 35 gt ja
68. se 2 600 4 pole 1 set 4units A 3WX36 23 4AC00 1 se 3 500 2500 and 3200A II 3 pole 1 set 3units A 3WX36 23 4BB00 1 se 5 400 4 pole 1 set 4units A 3WX36 23 4BC00 1 se 7 100 1 Please determine the number of connecting bars required yourself 2 Required for protection against flashover at voltages gt AC 415 V This quantity or a multiple thereof can be ordered Siemens LV 30 2004 5 113 Circuit Breakers up to 3200 A Discontinued Series Accessories spare parts Designation Rated current J Size Number of poles Required DT For 1 set PS Weight order or 1 unit per PU quantity approx per circuit i breaker kg For guide frames S Connecting bars for 2000 A ll 3 and 4 pole 1 unit A 3WX36 23 1DA00_ 3s junit on req ys front accessible con o P a o 2 nection vertical 2500 and 3200 A Il 3 and 4 pole Junit A 3WX3623 1EA00 unit on req g single hole bar z 5 Vertical double hole 2000 A ll 3 and 4 pole 1 unit A 3WX36 23 1DA01_ junit on req o bar holes to s VE DIN 43673 2500 and 3200 A II 3 and 4 pole tunit2 A 3WX36 23 1EA01 unit on req Q a 2 13 14 Position Connected Test Discon Precondition A oe indicator switch position position nected i actuated by withdraw position able circuit breaker 4 NO 1NO 1NO possible ifno 1 set A 3WX3684 1JA10 1set onreq 1 NC 1 NC 1 NC pos switch mounted yet 1 unit 3 NO 2 NO 1NO possible if no 1 set A 3WX36 84 1JC10
69. short time current rating Zew and short circuit switching capacity Isc for non automatic circuit breakers see Page 5 77 This quantity or a multiple thereof can be ordered Siemens LV 30 2004 5 79 Non Automatic Circuit Breakers for DC up to 4000 A SENTRON WL Accessories spare parts H selection and ordering data Guide frames for DC non automatic circuit breakers Max rated circuit Guide frame for 3 pole Guide frame for 4 pole breaker current I max non automatic non automatic circuit breakers circuit breakers Size a main circuit connection single hole 2000 B 3WL9 212 3DAO00 O00A 1 tunit 31 000 B 3WL9 212 3EAD0 O0A 1 1 unit 37 000 Fron main circuit connection double hole 2000 B 3WL9 212 3DBO0 O0A 1 tunit 31 000 B 3WL9 212 3EBO0 O0A 1 1 unit 37 000 Horzonia main circuit connection 2000 B 3WL9 212 3DCOO ODA 1 tunit 31 000 B 3WL9 212 3ECOO ODA 1 1 unit 37 000 4000 B 3WL9 212 6DCOO ODA 1 tunit 60 000 B 3WL9 212 6ECOO ODA 1 1 unit 84 000 Vora main circuit connection 2000 B 3WL9 212 3DDO0 O0A 1 tunit 31 000 B 3WL9 212 3EDO0 O0A 1 1 unit 37 000 i 4000 B 3WL9 212 6DDO0 O0A 1 dunit 60 000 B 3WL9212 6EDOO ODA 1 1unit 84 000 Main circuit connection connecting flange Il 2000 B 3WL9 212 3DEO0O O0A 1 dunit 31 000 B 3WL9212 3EEDO ODA 1 1unit 37 000 ll 4000 B 3WL9 212 6DEO0O O0A 1 dunit 60 000 B 3WL9212 6EEDO ODA 1 1unit 84 000 Number of auxiliary supply connectors none 1 connector 2 connectors 3 connector
70. stranded DIN 46228 T 2 with twin end sleeve 2 x 0 5 mm AWG 20 to 2 x 1 5 mm AWG 16 optional conn tension spring without end sleeve 2 x 0 5 mm AWG 20 to 2 x 2 5 mm AWG 14 with end sleeve to 2 x 0 5 mm AWG 20 to 2 x 1 5 mm AWG 16 DIN 46228 T 2 Weights 3 pole Fixed mounted circ br kg 43 43 43 56 56 56 56 56 Withdrawable circ br kg 45 45 45 60 60 60 60 60 Guide frame kg 25 25 25 31 31 gi Sil 31 4 pole Fixed mounted circ br kg 50 50 50 67 67 67 67 67 Withdrawable circ br kg 54 54 54 72 72 2 v2 72 Guide frame kg 30 30 30 37 SG S 37 87 1 Break time on instantaneous short circuit release with ETU15B 85 ms 3 Maintenance means replace main contact elements and arc chutes see 2 Make time via activation solenoid for synchronization purposes short time excited 50 ms Operator s Guide Siemens LV 30 2004 SENTRON WL General data Size ll ll Type 3WL12 25 3WL12 32 3WL13 40 3WL13 50 3WL13 63 Rated current J at 40 C at 50 60 Hz Main conductor A 2500 3200 4000 5000 6300 Neutral conductor only on 4 pole versions A 2500 3200 4000 5000 6300 Rated operating voltage U at 50 60 Hz AC V up to 690 1000 up to690 1000 upto 690 1000 up to 690 1000 up to 690 1000 1000 V design see options Rated insulation voltage U AC V 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 Rated impulse withstand voltage Uimp Main circuits kV 12 2 12 12 2 Auxiliary circuits
71. system tral system over 300 V 10 n up to 600 V 10 l i 2 pole 1 pole 2 pole only with grounded 2 parallel conducting paths neutral system only with grounded neutral system over 600 V 10 ib I up to 1000 V 10 l l j l l 1 pole 2 pole 1 pole only with grounded only with grounded neutral only with grounded neu neutral system system tral system The connection to the circuit breakers is not dependent on di rection and polarity the circuit diagrams can be adapted accordingly If the parallel or series connections are made directly to the connecting bars for thermal reasons the continuous load on the circuit breakers must only be 80 of the permissible operating current If the parallel or series connection is made at a distance of 1 m from the connecting bars the circuit breaker can be used at full operating current load grounded neutral system L load Dimensions as for Circuit breakers non automatic circuit break ers up to 6300 A SENTRON WL Pages 5 60 to 5 67 Siemens LV 30 2004 e Yal ye l ELE Overview ONAN 1 Withdrawable circuit breaker 2 Indication and reset button after ripping for tripped signaling switch and mechanical closing lockout 3 Spring charge indicator 4 Contact position indicator 5 Ready to close indicator 6 ON button mechanical with sealing cap 7 OFF button mechanical 8 ON button electrical 9 Electronic trip unit 10 I
72. w 2 1 i o J 3 7 a 20 82 Le Vertical connection 20 i 10 NSE00663 AE Py M A 85 210 210 210 tt 3 Safety clearances to grounded parts as well as to live parts see page 5 60 Siemens LV 30 2004 5 65 Size Ill up to 6300 A withdrawable design 3 and 4 pole Standard design Horizontal connection up to 5000 A 5A 4 NSE00665a NSE00671a o 139 be 260 a 270 4 217 s 704 a 914 160 160 160 160 N g 2 C nE 571954210 4210 L 210 4 pole design 3 Slots 4 mm wide 5 mm deep for supporting phase barriers in the system Auxiliary connector with SIGUT screw type terminals Auxiliary connector with tension spring connection Dimension to inside surface of the closed cabinet door 4 5 6 7 SENTRON WL in connected position 8 SENTRON WL in test position 9 SENTRON WL in disconnected position 0 Fixing holes diameter 10 mm 1 Terminal face 2 Top edge of circuit breaker only AC 1000 V design C
73. with the basic configuration 8B8WN6___ ___ 58 1KA_ the blank spaces can be configured as required and one trans fer control device 3WX36 66 7JAOO The transfer control device can be mounted to the wall or installed in the control cabinet It can be installed in the control cabinet without an enclosure Transfer control device The transfer control device can be used to implement automatic network switchovers to IEC 60947 6 1 The two 3WN6 circuit breakers must be mutually interlocked for this purpose See Accessories spare parts For fixed mounted and withdrawable circuit breakers Mutual mechani cal interlocking Network switching control unit 3WN6 3WN6 ANSEO_01143 pe AUT 0 Main network AUTOMATIC Back up network l 1 E Main or back up network available Main network available Main network available Back up network available l 1 i i QN OFF QG OFF QN ON QG OFF QN ON QG OFF QN OFF QG ON Main network fails and back up Main network fails and back up Return to main network network is available network is available a ar QN OFF QG ON 1 QN ON QG OFF Return to main network 1 QN ON QG OFF i Back up network fails QN OFF QG ON l QN OFF QG ON T ANSEO_01144 Return to main network QN ON QG OFF Mode of operati
74. 0 250 V AC 208 240 V B 3WL9111 0AE13 0AA0 1 unit on req AC 380 415 V B 3WL9 111 0AE14 0AA0 1 unit on req Motorized operating mechanism DC 24 30 V B 3WL9 111 0AF01 0AA0 1 unit on req DC 48 60 V B 3WL9 111 0AF02 0AA0 1 unit on req DC 110 125 V AC 110 127 V B 3WL9 111 0AF03 0AA0 1 unit on req DC 220 250 V AC 208 240 V B 3WL9 111 0AF04 0AA0 1 unit on req Auxiliary contacts 3WL9 111 0AB08 0AA0 Auxiliary contact block 2 NO 2NC B 3WL9111 OAGO1 OAAO junit on req 2 NO B 3WL9 111 0AG02 0AA0 1 unit on req 1NO 1NC B 3WL9 111 0AG03 0AA0 1 unit on req 3WL9 111 OADO6 OAAO This quantity or a multiple thereof can be ordered P O H NSE01001 3WL9 111 0AE0 0AA0 p O T_T nseo1002 3WL9 111 0AE1 0AA0 3WL9 111 OAFO OAAO Siemens LV 30 2004 3WL9 111 OAGO3 0AAO 5 49 Circuit Breakers Non Automatic Circuit Breakers up to 6300 A SENTRON WL Accessories spare parts Designation DT Order No PS Weight per PU approx kg Door sealing frame B 3WL9111 OAP01 0OAAO unit on req Protective cover IP55 B SWL9 111 OAP02 0AA0 1 unit on req cannot be used in conjunction with door sealing frames cover removable and can be opened on both sides Shutters 3 pole Size B 3WL9111 OAP04 0AAO 1 unit on req Size II B 3WL9111 OAPO06 0OAAO 1
75. 0 85 1 26 DC 48 V DC 110 V DC 220 V Rated control supply voltage U AC 50 60 Hz V 110 127 208 240 380 415 DC V 24 30 48 110 220 250 Power input pickup continuous duty AC VA 200 pickup 5 DC W 200 pickup 5 Opening time of circuit breaker at U 0 ms 200 Design UVR F3 Instantaneous ms 80 With delay ms 200 Design UVR ty F8 With delay ty 0 2 3 2 s S DA 82 Reset via additional NC contact direct switching off ms lt 100 Short circuit protection 1A Smallest permissible fuse Contact position driven auxiliary switches S1 S2 S3 S4 S7 S8 Rated insulation voltage U AC DC V 300 Rated operating voltage U AC DC V 240 Switching capacity AC A 300 heavy duty A 10 50 60 Hz DC P 300 heavy duty A 10 Ready to close signaling switch S20 to UL 1054 Switching capacity Rated operating voltage V 250 Rated operating current A 3 1 24 V and 30 V only with undervoltage release UVR F3 Siemens LV 30 2004 5 71 uit wi SENTRON WL General data Functional overview of the electronic trip unit system Basic functions ETU25B ETU45B Overload protection v v Setting range Ip 1 x 0 4 0 45 0 5 0 55 0 6 0 4 0 45 0 5 0 55 0 6 0 65 0 7 0 8 0 9 0 65 0 7 0 8 0 9 1 Switchable overload protection v using sliding dolly switch t or 4tdependent functi
76. 0 A accessible from front Size II up to 3200 A IN 4 15 double hole Size III up to 4000 A Top Size up to 1600 A rear vertical Size II up to 2000 A Bottom Size Il up to 2500 A accessible from front Size Il up to 3200 A N16 EuN double hole Size III up to 4000 A Top Size up to 1600 A accessible from front Size II up to 2000 A single hole Size II up to 2500 A Bottom Size Il up to 3200 A INI 8 front horizontal Size Ill up to 4000 A Top Size up to 1600 A accessible from front Size II up to 2000 A double hole Size II up to 2500 A Bottom Size Il up to 3200 A IN 1119 rear horizontal Size III up to 4000 A Top Size I up to 1600 A rear vertical Size II up to 2000 A Bottom Size Il up to 2500 A front horizontal Size Il up to 3200 A IN 2 0 Size Ill up to 4000 A Size III up to 5000 A Top Size up to 1600 A accessible from front Size II up to 2000 A single hole Size Il up to 2500 A Bottom Size Il up to 3200 A IN 2 2 rear vertical Size Ill up to 4000 A Top Size up to 1600 A accessible from front Size II up to 2000 A double hole Size II up to 2500 A Bottom Size Il up to 3200 A NI21 3 rear vertica Size III up to 4000 A Top Size up to 1600 A rear horizontal Size II up to 2000 A Bottom Size II up to 2500 A NEBA rear vertica Size Il up to 3200 A Size IIl up to 4000 A Size III up to 5000 A Siemens LV 30 2004 5 43 Circuit Breakers Non Automatic Circuit Breakers up to 63
77. 0 and 5 31 4 Current transformers for vectorial summation current formation or for pro 1 Rated current determined by rated current module tection of the neutral conductor and current transformers for detection of On the standard design the supplied module is equal to the max rated the ground fault current in the grounded star point of the transformer must type current be ordered separately see Page 5 46 If a lower rated current is required adaptation by order code on page 5 37 5 Size III circuit breakers are not available with electronic trip unit design 2 Permissible short time current rating Ig and rated short circuit making ETU15B capacity Ign for non automatic circuit breakers see Page 5 20 6 ETU45B to ETU76B with ground fault protection module GFM AT alarm 3 Required accessories PROFIBUS communication setup and Measure and tripping see Page 5 46 ment function Plus Order No with Z and order code F02 and FO5 E Start of delivery on request respectively see Page 5 38 This quantity or a multiple thereof can be ordered Siemens LV 30 2004 Circuit Breakers Non Automatic Circuit Breakers up to 6300 A SENTRON WL 4 pole fixed mounted design Size Max rated circuit Rated current ECO switching capacity N PS Weight Standard switching capacity S PS Weight breaker current J T y 440 V per PU Teu 440 V per PU In max Order No approx approx Order No supplements see Page 5 36 kg kg
78. 00 2500 100 B 3WL52 25 401031 1 unit 59 000 3000 3000 100 B 3WL52 30 401031 1 unit 64 000 Ul 4000 4000 100 C 3WL53 40 401031 1 unit 82 000 II 5000 5000 100 C 3WL53 50 40031 1 unit 82 000 Front main circuit connection single hole l 1000 1000 65 B 3WL51 10 30033 1 unit 43 000 l 1600 1600 65 B 3WL51 16 30033 1 unit 43 000 l 2000 2000 100 B 3WL52 20 40033 1 unit 56 000 2500 2500 100 B 3WL52 25 40033 1 unit 59 000 3000 3000 100 B 3WL52 30 40033 1 unit 64 000 Ul 4000 4000 100 C 3WL53 40 40033 1 unit 82 000 Front main circuit connection double hole 1000 1000 65 B 3WL51 10 30034 1 unit 43 000 1600 1600 65 B 3WL51 16 30034 1 unit 43 000 2000 2000 100 B 3WL52 20 4010134 1 unit 56 000 l 2500 2500 100 B 3WL52 25 40034 1 unit 59 000 3000 3000 100 B 3WL52 30 40034 1 unit 64 000 II 4000 4000 100 C 3WL53 40 40034 1 unit 82 000 Order No supplements Electronic trip units Design without ground fault protection ETU25B protection functions LSI CB ETU45B protection functions LSIN EB ETU45B protection functions LSIN with 4 line display FB Design with ground fault protection ETU4S5B protection functions LSING 3 EG ETU45B protection functions LSING with 4 line display FG Standard Order No supplements for further Order No supplements see Page 5 36 Manual operating mechanism with mechanical closing 1AA2 Without 1st and 2n
79. 00 3200 80 B 3WL12 32 301034 1 unit 64 000 Non automatic circuit breakers Order No supplements Order No supplements without electronic trip unit AA AA without electronic trip unit communication AB AB measurement function optional a Electronic trip units Design without ground fault protection ETU15B protection functions LI BB BB ETU25B protection functions LSI CB CB ETU45B protection functions LSIN EB EB ETU45B protection functions LSIN with 4 line display FB FB ETUSS5B protection functions LSIN JB JB ETU76B prot functions LSIN with pixel graphics display NB NB Design with ground fault protection ETU27B protection functions LSING4 DG DG ETU45B protection functions LSING EG EG ETU45B protection functions LSING with 4 line display FG FG ETUSS5B protection functions LSING JG JG ETU76B prot functions LSING w pixel graphic display NG NG Standard Order No supplements for further Order No supplements see Page 5 36 Manual operating mechanism with mechanical closing Without 15t and 2 aux releases aux sw 2 NC 2 NO For footnotes see Page 5 29 1AA2 1AA2 Siemens LV 30 2004 5 28 This quantity or a multiple thereof can be ordered Circuit Breakers Non Automatic Circuit Breakers up to 6300 A Size Max rated circuit breaker Rated current current T Th max A A Horizontal main circuit connection SENTRON WL 3 pole TAZ Ke XT o High s
80. 00 800 50 B 3WL11 08 201047 tunit 84 000 65 B 3WL11 08 30047 1 unit 84 000 1000 1000 50 B 3WL11 10 20047 tunit 84 000 65 B 3WL11 10 30047 1unit 84 000 1250 1250 50 B 3WL11 12 201047 tunit 84 000 65 B 3WL11 12 30047 1 unit 84 000 1600 1600 50 B 3WL11 16 20047 tunit 84 000 65 B 3WL11 16 30047 1 unit 84 000 Il 800 800 80 B 3WL12 08 301047 1 unit 109 000 Il 1000 1000 80 B 3WL12 10 301047 1 unit 109 000 Il 1250 1250 80 B 3WL12 12 30047 1 unit 109 000 Il 1600 1600 80 B 3WL12 16 30047 1 unit 109 000 Il 2000 2000 55 B 3WL12 20 20047 1 unit 109 000 80 B 3WL12 20 30047 1 unit 109 000 Il 2500 2500 55 B 3WL12 25 20047 1 unit 123 000 80 B 3WL12 25 30047 1 unit 123 000 Il 3200 3200 80 B 3WL12 32 301047 1 unit 136 000 With guide frame connecting flange 630 630 50 B 3WL11 06 20048 tunit 84 000 65 B 3WL11 06 30048 1 unit 84 000 800 800 50 B 3WL11 08 20048 tunit 84 000 65 B 3WL11 08 30048 1 unit 84 000 1000 1000 50 B 3WL11 10 20048 tunit 84 000 65 B 3WL11 10 30048 1 unit 84 000 1250 1250 50 B 3WL11 12 20048 1unit 84 000 65 B 3WL11 12 30048 1 unit 84 000 l 1600 1600 50 B 3WL11 16 20048 tunit 84 000 65 B 3WL11 16 30048 1 unit 84 000 Il 800 800 80 B 3WL12 08 30048 1 unit 109 000 Il 1000 1000 80 B 3WL12 10 30048 1 unit 109 000 Il 1250 1250 80 B 3WL12 12 30048 1 unit 109 000 Il
81. 00 A SENTRON WL Accessories spare parts Overview Determination of the number of auxiliary supply connectors required This selection is only required if the guide frame is ordered under a The required number of auxiliary supply connectors separate Order No depends on 4 e operating mechanism type A x XS e electronic trip unit with without current transformer 3 M e type and number of auxiliary releases 5 e number of auxiliary switches g in li e COM15 communication link Number of auxil Terminal iary supply con nectors a First auxiliary supply connector X6 always required 1 X6 b Operating mechanism b1 Manual operating mechanism with stored energy feature with mechanical closing 0 b2 Manual operating mechanism with stored energy feature with mechanical and electrical closing 0 X6 b3 Manual motorized operating mechanism with stored energy feature with mechanical and electrical closing 1 X5 c Electronic trip unit cl Electronic trip unit ETU15B ETU25B ETU27B 0 c2 Electronic trip unit ETU45B ETU55B ETU76B internal CubicleBUS 1 X8 Terminals for external current transformer for overload protection in the neutral conductor and ground fault protection c3 Current transformer fitted in the neutral conductor required with 3 pole circuit breakers if c2 is not selected 1 X8 c4 Current transformer in the star point of the transformer required if c2 or c3 is not selected 1 X8 d Auxiliary r
82. 00 A Top Size up to 1600 A accessible from front Size II up to 2000 A double hole Size II up to 2500 A PIONS Bottom Size Il up to 3200 A accessible from front Size III up to 4000 A single hole Top Size up to 1600 A rear horizontal Size II up to 2000 A double hole Size II up to 2500 A PIO Z Bottom Size Il up to 3200 A accessible from front Size III up to 4000 A single hole Top Size up to 1600 A rear vertical Size Il up to 2000 A Bottom Size II up to 2500 A POLS accessible from front Size Il up to 3200 A single hole Size III up to 4000 A Top Size up to 1600 A OT connecting flange Size Il up to 2000 A Bottom Size II up to 2500 A PIONS accessible from front Size II up to 3200 A single hole Size III up to 4000 A Top Size up to 1600 A accessible from front Size Il up to 2000 A single hole Size II up to 2500 A P11 Bottom Size Il up to 3200 A accessible from front Size III up to 4000 A double hole Top Size up to 1600 A rear horizontal Size II up to 2000 A Bottom Size II up to 2500 A P12 accessible from front Size II up to 3200 A double hole Size III up to 4000 A Top Size up to 1600 A rear vertical Size II up to 2000 A Bottom Size II up to 2500 A PHIS accessible from front Size Il up to 3200 A double hole Size III up to 4000 A Top Size I up to 1600 A connecting flange Size Il up to 2000 A Bottom Size II up to 2500 A
83. 000 Ul 5000 5000 100 C 3WL53 50 40035 1 unit 88 000 l 1000 1000 65 B 3WL51 10 30036 1 unit 70 000 l 1600 1600 65 B 3WL51 16 30036 1 unit 70 000 2000 2000 100 B 3WL52 20 40036 1 unit 91 000 2500 2500 100 B 3WL52 25 40036 1 unit 102 000 3000 3000 100 B 3WL52 30 40036 1 unit 113 000 Ill 4000 4000 100 C 3WL53 40 40036 1 unit 148 000 Ill 5000 5000 100 C 3WL53 50 40036 1 unit 148 000 l 1000 1000 65 B 3WL51 10 30037 1 unit 70 000 1600 1600 65 B 3WL51 16 30037 1 unit 70 000 2000 2000 100 B 3WL52 20 40037 1 unit 91 000 l 2500 2500 100 B 3WL52 25 40037 1 unit 102 000 3000 3000 100 B 3WL52 30 4007 1 unit 113 000 Ul 4000 4000 100 C 3WL53 40 40037 1 unit 148 000 IlI 5000 5000 100 C 3WL53 50 400837 1 unit 148 000 With guide frame connecting flange 1000 1000 65 B 3WL51 10 30038 1 unit 70 000 1600 1600 65 B 3WL51 16 30038 1 unit 70 000 l 2000 2000 100 B 3WL52 20 40038 1 unit 91 000 l 2500 2500 100 B 3WL52 25 40038 1 unit 102 000 3000 3000 100 B 3WL52 30 40038 1 unit 113 000 Ul 4000 4000 100 C 3WL53 40 40038 1 unit 148 000 Order No supplement Electronic trip units Design without ground fault protection ETU25B protection functions LSI CB ETU45B protection functions LSIN EB ETU45B protection functions LSIN with 4 line display FB Design with ground fault protection ETU45B protection functions LS
84. 000 690 1000 690 1000 Rated insulation voltage U AC V 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 Rated impulse withstand voltage Uimp Main circuits kV 12 12 12 i2 12 12 12 2 Auxiliary circuits kV 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 Control circuits kv 2 5 25 25 25 215 25 25 25 Isolating function to EN 60947 2 yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes Utilization category B Permissible ambient temperature in operation in operation with LCD max 55 C C 25 70 25 70 25 70 25 70 25 70 25 70 25 70 25 70 Storage special conditions for LCDs must be C 40 70 40 70 40 70 40 70 40 70 40 70 40 70 40 70 observed Permissible load up to 55 C Cu bare A 1000 1250 1600 800 1000 1250 1600 2000 at rear horizontal main up to 60 C Cu bare A 1000 1250 1600 800 1000 1250 1600 2000 circuit connections up to 70 C Cu painted A 1000 1210 1490 800 1000 1250 1600 2000 black Power loss at Jp with AC symmetrical load Fixed mounted circuit breaker W 100 105 150 40 45 80 85 180 Withdrawable circuit breaker W 195 205 350 85 95 165 175 320 Operating times Make time ms 35 35 35 So 35 35 35 35 Break time ms 38 38 38 34 34 34 34 34 Electr make time via activation solenoid ms 80 80 80 100 100 100 100 100 Electr break time via shunt release ms 73 73 reel 73 73 73 73 vo Electr break time instantaneous undervoltage release ms 73 T3 a 1E TE 73 ie Break time through ETU instantaneous short circuit ms 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 release Se
85. 1 2AA53 0AA0 tunit on req 500 B 3WL9 111 2AA54 0AA0 tunit on req 630 B 3WL9 111 2AA55 0AA0 tunit on req 800 B 3WL9 111 2AA56 0AA0 tunit on req 1000 B 3WL9 111 2AA57 0AA0 tunit on req For size Il II 1250 B 3WL9 111 2AA58 0AA0 tunit on req presi tos 1600 B 3WL9 111 2AA61 0AA0 tunit on req Rating Plug For size Il III 2000 B 3WL9 111 2AA62 0AA0 tunit on req AnS S200K 2500 B 3WL9 111 2AA63 0AA0 1unit on req sani 3000 B 3WL9 111 2AA77 0AA0 tunit on req 3WL9 111 2AA65 0AA00 For size III 4000 B 3WL9 111 2AA65 0AA0 tunit on req 5000 B 3WL9 111 2AA66 0AA0 tunit on req Ground fault module GFM A 45B only for ETU45B alarm only B 3WL9 111 2AT51 0AA0 1 unit on req GFM AT 45B only for ETU45B alarm and tripping B 3WL9 111 2AT53 0AA0 1 unit on req Ci 4 line display for ETU45B B 3WL9 111 1AT81 0AA0 1 unit on req Digital output module with rotary coding switch optical coupler outputs C 3WL9 111 1AT25 0AA0 1 unit on req Digital output module with rotary coding switch relay outputs C 3WL9 111 1AT26 0AA0 1 unit on req Digital output module configurable optical coupler outputs C 3WL9 111 1AT30 0AA0 1 unit on req Digital output module configurable relay outputs C 3WL9 111 1AT20 0AA0 1 unit on req Digital input module C 3WL9 111 1AT27 0AA0 1 unit on req Analog output module C 3WL9 111 1AT23 0AA0 1 unit on req Zone Selective Interlocking module C 3WL9 111 1AT21 0AA0 1 unit on req Tools for configuration opera
86. 1 uni 75 000 1600 1600 100 B 3WL12 16 40041 1 uni 75 000 2000 2000 100 B 3WL12 20 40041 1 uni 75 000 2500 2500 100 B 3WL12 25 4010141 1 uni 71 000 3200 3200 100 B 3WL12 32 40041 1 uni 77 000 15 4000 4000 100 C 3WL13 40 40041 1 unit 106 000 15 5000 5000 100 C 3WL13 50 40041 1 unit 106 000 15 6300 6300 100 C 3WL13 63 40041 1 unit 106 000 Front main circuit connection single hole 800 800 100 B 3WL12 08 40043 1 unit 67 000 1000 1000 100 B 3WL12 10 40043 1 unit 67 000 1250 1250 100 B 3WL12 12 440043 1 unit 67 000 1600 1600 100 B 3WL12 16 40043 1 unit 67 000 2000 2000 100 B 3WL12 20 40043 1 unit 67 000 2500 2500 100 B 3WL12 25 40043 1 uni 71 000 3200 3200 100 B 3WL12 32 40043 1 uni 77 000 15 4000 4000 100 C 3WL13 40 40043 1 unit 106 000 Front main circuit connection double hole 800 800 100 B 3WL12 08 40044 1 unit 67 000 1000 1000 100 B 3WL12 10 40044 1 unit 67 000 1250 1250 100 B 3WL12 12 40044 1 unit 67 000 1600 1600 100 B 3WL12 16 40044 1 unit 67 000 2000 2000 100 B 3WL12 20 40044 1 unit 67 000 2500 2500 100 B 3WL12 25 40044 1 uni 71 000 3200 3200 100 B 3WL12 32 40044 1 uni 77 000 19 4000 4000 100 C 3WL13 40 40044 1 unit 106 000 Order No supplements Non automatic circuit breakers2 without electronic trip unit AA without electronic trip unit communication measurement function opt
87. 1600 1600 80 B 3WL12 16 30048 1 unit 109 000 Il 2000 2000 55 B 3WL12 20 20048 1 unit 109 000 80 B 3WL12 20 30048 1 unit 109 000 Il 2500 2500 55 B 3WL12 25 20048 1 unit 123 000 80 B 3WL12 25 30048 1 unit 123 000 Il 3200 3200 80 B 3WL12 32 30048 1 unit 136 000 Non automatic circuit breakers Order No supplements Order No supplements without electronic trip unit AA AA without electronic trip unit communication measure AB AB ment function optional lm Electronic trip units Design without ground fault protection ETU15B protection functions LI BB BB ETU25B protection functions LSI CB CB ETU45B protection functions LSIN EB EB ETU45B protection functions LSIN with 4 line display FB FB ETUS55B protection functions LSIN JB JB ETU76B prot functions LSIN with pixel graphics display NB NB Design with ground fault protection ETU27B protection functions LSING4 DG DG ETU45B protection functions LSING EG EG ETU45B protection functions LSING with 4 line display FG FG ETUS5S5B protection functions LSING JG JG ETU76B prot func LSING with pixel graphics display NG NG Standard Order No supplements for further Order No supplements for circuit breakers and guide frames see Page 5 36 Manual operating mechanism with mechanical closing Without 15t and 2 auxiliary releases auxiliary switch 2NC 2NO 1AA2 1AA2 For footnotes see Page 5 35 5 3
88. 1600 A 2 vertical connections 38WL9 111 OAMO01 0AA0 are required 2 In the case of vertical connection size II up to 2500 A 1 vertical connection 3WL 111 0AM02 0AA0 is required up to 3200 A 2 vertical connections 38WL9 111 OAMO02 0AA0 are required 5 52 Siemens LV 30 2004 This quantity or a multiple thereof can be ordered Circuit Breakers Non Automatic Circuit Breakers up to 6300 A SENTRON WL Accessories spare parts DT Order No PS Weight per PU approx kg Designation Main circuit connections withdrawable version Specified for each connection Front accessible main circuit connections single hole top or bottom Size up to 1000 A Size 1250 A 1600 A Size Il up to 2000 A Size Il up to 2500 A Size Il up to 3200 A Size Ill up to 4000 A Front Size up to 1000 A 3WL9 111 OANO1 OAAO unit on req 3WL9 111 OANO2 0AAO unit on req 3WL9 111 OANO3 0AAO unit on req 3WL9 111 OANO04 0AAO unit on req 3WL9 111 OANO5 OAAO unit on req 3WL9 111 OANO6 0OAAO junit on req 3WL9 111 OANO7 OAAO junit on req en connec Size 1250 A 1600 A 3WL9 111 0AN08 0AA0 1 unit on req SWL9 111 OAN14 OAAO to DIN 43673 Size II up to 2000 A 3WL9 111 0AN11 OAAO 1unit on req double hole at top or bottom Size II up to 2500 A 3WL9 111 0AN12 0AA0 1unit on req Size Il up to 3200 A 3WL9 111 0AN13 0AA0 1 unit on req Size III up to 4000 A 3WL9 111 0AN14 0AAO unit on req Support for
89. 2 0AAO 1unit on req Ranged 400 B 3WL9111 0AA53 0AA0 1unit onreq 500 B 3WL9 111 0AA54 0AA0 1 unit on req ER 630 B 3WL9111 0AA55 0AA0O 1unit on req 3WL9 111 0AA64 0AAO 800 B 3WL9 111 0AA56 0AA0 1 unit on req 1000 B 3WL9 111 0AA57 0AA0 1 unit on req For size Il Ill 1250 B 3WL9 111 0AA58 0AA0 1 unit on req 1600 B 3WL9111 0AA61 0AA0 dunit on req NSE0_01027a For size Il III 2000 B 3WL9111 0AA62 0AA0 1 unit on req 3WL9 111 0AT51 0AA0 2500 B 3WL9 111 0AA63 0AA0 1unit on req 3200 B 3WL9 111 0AA64 0AA0 1 unit on req For size Ill 4000 B 3WL9 111 0AA65 0AA0 1unit on req 5000 B 3WL9 111 OAA66 0AA0 1 unit on req 6300 B 3WL9111 0AA67 0AA0 1 unit on req Ground fault module ato 606808 GFM AT 45B only for ETU45B alarm only B 3WL9 111 0AT51 0AA0 1unit on req 3WL9 111 0AA2 0AAQ GFM AT 45B only for ETU45B alarm and release B 3WL9 111 0AT53 0AA0 1 unit on req GFM AT 55B 76B only for ETU55B ETU76B alarm only B 3WL9 111 0AT54 0AA0 tunit on req GFM AT 55B 76B only for ETU55B ETU76B alarm and release B 3WL9 111 0AT56 0AA0 1unit on req Display 4 line display for ETU45B B 3WL9 111 0AT81 0AA0 1unit on req Internal transformers for neutral conductor Size B 3WL9111 0AA11 0AA0 1 unit on req 3WL9 111 0AA3 0AA0 including wiring kit Size II B 3WL9111 0AA12 0AA0 1 unit on req Size Ill B 3WL9 111 0AA13 0AA0 1 unit on req sc a External transformers for neutral conductor Size B 3WL9 111 0AA21 0AA0 1 unit on req 8 T5 see Page
90. 20 20032 1unit 56 000 80 B 3WL12 20 30032 1 unit 56 000 2500 2500 65 B 3WL12 25 20032 1unit 59 000 80 B 3WL12 25 30032 1 unit 59 000 3200 3200 80 B 3WL12 32 301032 1 unit 64 000 Vertical main circuit connection 630 630 50 B 3WL11 06 201031 1unit 43 000 65 B 3WL11 06 30031 1 unit 43 000 800 800 50 B 3WL11 08 201031 1unit 43 000 65 B 3WL11 08 30031 1 unit 43 000 1000 1000 60 B 3WL11 10 201031 1unit 43 000 65 B 3WL11 10 30031 1 unit 43 000 1250 1250 50 B 3WL11 12 20031 1unit 43 000 65 B 3WL11 12 30031 1 unit 43 000 1600 1600 60 B 3WL11 16 20031 1unit 43 000 65 B 3WL11 16 30031 1 unit 43 000 800 800 80 B 3WL12 08 301031 1 unit 56 000 1000 1000 80 B 3WL12 10 30031 1 unit 56 000 1250 1250 80 B 3WL12 12 30031 1 unit 56 000 1600 1600 80 B 3WL12 16 30031 1 unit 56 000 2000 2000 55 B 3WL12 20 20031 1unit 56 000 80 B 3WL12 20 30031 1 unit 56 000 2500 2500 65 B 3WL12 25 20031 1unit 59 000 80 B 3WL12 25 301031 1 unit 59 000 3200 3200 80 B 3WL12 32 30031 1 unit 64 000 Front main circuit connection single hole 630 630 50 B 3WL11 06 20033 1unit 43 000 65 B 3WL11 06 30033 1 unit 43 000 800 800 50 B 3WL11 08 20033 1unit 43 000 65 B 3WL11 08 30033 1 unit 43 000 1000 1000 50 B 3WL11 10 20033 tunit 43 000 65 B 3WL11 10 30033 q1 unit 43 000 1250 1250 50 B 3WL11 12 20033 tuni
91. 20 250 A 3WX36 31 1JK00 1 set 2 400 Motorized operating Precondition 11th consisting of motor and mechanism 12th positions of Order wiring rated control supply retrofit possible for No for circuit breaker voltage of motor precondition see table alongside 3WN6 00 AC 50 60 Hz DC V V 11 24 1 set A 3WX36 32 1JB00 1 set 1 600 14 48 A 3WX36 32 1JF00 1 set 1 600 15 60 A 3WX36 32 1JG00 1 set 1 600 11 110 127 110 125 1 set A 3WX36 32 1JH00 1 set 1 600 14 15 16 11 220 240 220 250 1 set A 3WX36 32 1JK00 1 set 1 600 14 15 16 18 Electrical closing consisting of closing solenoid Y1 D possible if electrical ON button and wiring rated control supply 11th position of voltage of closing solenoid Y1 Order No for circuit breaker is 0 AC 50 60 Hz po 24 1 set A 3WX36 33 1JB00 1 set 0 800 48 A 3WX36 33 1JF00 1 set 0 800 60 3WX36 33 1JG00 1 set 0 800 110 127 110 125 1 set A 3WX36 33 1JH00 1 set 0 800 2290 240 220 250 A 3WX36 33 1JK00 1 set 0 800 1 When units are retrofitted the number of auxiliary supply connectors see Page 5 110 must be checked Additionally required auxiliary supply con nectors must be ordered as shown on Page 5 113 or 5 114 This quantity or a multiple thereof can be ordered Siemens LV 30 2004 5 111 Circuit Breakers up to 3200 A Discontinued Series Accessories spare parts When retrofitting the circuit breaker Order No must be added to the name plate on the operato
92. 2004 e g Z KO1 3BWL9 111 OAKO1 OAAO Siemens LV 30 2004 5 46 This quantity or a multiple thereof can be ordered Circuit Breakers Non Automatic Circuit Breakers up to 6300 A SENTRON WL Accessories spare parts Designation DT Order No PS Weight LP per PU Loy approx X kg LLP S De Locking devices le Protective covers for mechanical ON OFF without safety lock B 3WL9111 0BA21 0AAO0 junit on req ii A consisting of 2 transparent covers each made by CES B 3WL9 111 0BA22 0AA0 junit on req A J 3 for sealing or for attaching padlocks made by IKON B 3WL9111 0BA24 0AAO junit on req S AA 3 cover with 6 35 mm hole for tool actuation SWL9 111 0BA22 0AA0 lock mount for safety lock for key operation Locking device against unauthorized closing Mounting set FORTRESS or B 3WL9 111 0BA31 0AA0 junit on req in the operator control panel CASTELL Disconnector unit E Made by Ronis B 3WL9 111 0BA33 0AA0 unit on req meets requirements for main circuit breakers Made by KIRK Key B 3WL9111 0BA34 0AAO 1 unit on req to EN 60204 VDE 0113 Made by Profalux B 3WL9 111 0BA35 0AA0 unit on req Made by CES B 3WL9 111 0BA36 0AA0 junit on req Made by IKON B 3WL9 111 0BA38 0AA0 1 unit on req Mounting set for padlocks B 3WL9111 0BA41 0AAO unit on req Locking device against unauthorized closing Made by CES B 3WL9 111 0BA51 0AA0 junit on
93. 25 40033 1 unit 59 000 l 3200 3200 100 B 3WL12 32 40033 1 unit 64 000 1115 4000 4000 100 C 3WL13 40 40033 1 unit 82 000 Front main circuit connection double hole Non automatic circuit breakers 800 800 100 B 3WL12 08 40034 1t unit 56 000 1000 1000 100 B 3WL12 10 40034 1 unit 56 000 l 1250 1250 100 B 3WL12 12 40034 1 unit 56 000 1600 1600 100 B 3WL12 16 4010134 1 unit 56 000 2000 2000 100 B 3WL12 20 40034 1 unit 56 000 2500 2500 100 B 3WL12 25 40034 1t unit 59 000 3200 3200 100 B 3WL12 32 40034 1t unit 64 000 1115 4000 4000 100 C 3WL13 40 40034 1t unit 82 000 Order No supplements without electronic trip unit AA without electronic trip unit communication measurement function optional a AB Electronic trip units Design without ground fault protection ETU15B protection functions LI BB ETU25B protection functions LSI CB ETU45B protection functions LSIN EB ETU45B protection functions LSIN with 4 line display FB ETU55B protection functions LSIN JB ETU76B protection functions LSIN with pixel graphics display NB Design with ground fault protection ETU27B protection functions LSING4 DG ETU45B protection functions LSING EG ETU45B protection functions LSING with 4 line display FG ETU55B protection functions LSING JG ETU76B protection functions LSING with pixel graphics display NG
94. 4 84 119 1 Break time on instantaneous short circuit release with ETU15B 85 ms 3 Maintenance means replace main contact elements and arc chutes 2 Make time via activation solenoid for synchronization purposes see Operator s Guide short time excited 50 ms 5 22 Siemens LV 30 2004 Ci 7 Circuit Breakers Non Automatic ej 3 ircuit Breakers up to 6300 A SENTRON WL General data Size l IM Manual operating mechanism with mechanical closing Closing Max force required to operate the hand lever N lt 230 charging stored energy Required number of strokes on the hand lever 9 feature Manual operating mechanism with mechanical and electrical closing Charging stored energy feature Closing solenoid CC Operating range OE a List Extended operating range for battery operation for DC 24 V DC 48 V OTE a AAE U DC 60 V DC 110 V DC 220 V Power input AC DC VAIW 15 15 Minimum command duration at U for the closing solenoid ms 60 Short circuit protection 1 A TDz time lag 1 A Smallest permissible DIAZED fuse operational class gL miniature circuit breaker with C characteristic Manual motorized operating mechanism with mechanical and electrical closing Manual operating mecha For data see above nism Motor Operating range 0 85 1 1 x U Extended coil voltage tolerance for battery operation for DC 24 V DC 48 V OF 126
95. 4 Siemens LV 30 2004 This quantity or a multiple thereof can be ordered Circuit Breakers Non Automatic Circuit Breakers up to 6300 A SENTRON WL 4 pole w awable design Size Max rated circuit breaker Rated current High switching capacity H 440 V BRSi Weight current Th EN per PU lman r o Supplemen approx A A kA DT e 5 36 kg Without guide frame for guide frames see Page 5 45 800 800 100 B 3WL12 08 40045 1 unit 75 000 l 1000 1000 100 B 3WL12 10 40045 1 unit 75 000 1250 1250 100 B 3WL12 12 40045 1 unit 75 000 l 1600 1600 100 B 3WL12 16 40045 1 unit 75 000 l 2000 2000 100 B 3WL12 20 40045 1 unit 75 000 2500 2500 100 B 3WL12 25 4010145 1 unit 76 000 l 3200 3200 100 B 3WL12 32 40045 1 unit 82 000 111 4000 4000 100 C 3WL13 40 40045 1 unit 106 000 1115 5000 5000 100 C 3WL13 50 40045 1 unit 106 000 11 6300 6300 100 C 3WL13 63 40045 1 unit 227 000 With guide frame horizontal main circuit connection 800 800 100 B 3WL12 08 40046 1 unit 109 000 1000 1000 100 B 3WL12 10 40046 1 unit 109 000 1250 1250 100 B 3WL12 12 40046 1 unit 109 000 l 1600 1600 100 B 3WL12 16 40046 1 unit 109 000 l 2000 2000 100 B 3WL12 20 40046 1 unit 109 000 l 2500 2500 100 B 3WL12 25 40046 1 unit 123 000 l 3200 3200 100 B 3WL12 32 40046 1 unit 136 000 111 4000 4000 100 C 3WL13 40 40046 1 u
96. 4 i ee eS A a Ausgel st Meldeschalter 5E ima 8 ing trip signalling switch S24 13 SIH Oh COM 15 5 Z 5 12 i aaea Option F02 33 Speicherzustandsmeldung 11 aH See Spring charged signal S21 ie 3s E pring g g 10 ra ef oO 5 E OR Elektrisch EIN Local electric close S10 9 o ve L L Ulu So Sx 3 Peas 23 R s FEE 7 Uee E0 26 6 gol Ta 62 EO Es Xi Meldeschalter am ersten Hilfsausl ser S22 5 i ca g X 2 gt Signaling contact at the 1 st auxiliary release 4 l 55 o ala 22038 3 gE 2 E g Meldeschalter am zweiten Hilfsausl ser S23 2 5 2 g3 go Signaling contact at the 2nd auxiliary release 1 a GS 5 58 338 x6 Pee z 14 A L L Erster Hilfsausl ser F1 f 1st auxiliary release F1 ST 13 N L Us I Uc ere 12 did is 10 S1 NC 9 Einschaltmagnet Closing solenoid 8 rr N L UIU biie Se 6 Einschaltbereitschaftsmeldung Ready to close signal S20 5 S2 ngs NO 4 3 S2 a NC X5 nur F4 Schnell AUS F4 only quick OFF ana a ST ERGENCy che nur F4 Schnell AUS F4 only quick OFF I 13 or short terminals Zweiter Hilfsausl ser F2 ST F3 UVR F4 UVR td 12 L L 2nd auxiliary release F2 ST F3 UVR F4 UVR td a Us 1 Us gt 11 N L L S3 S oder S7 S S3 NO or S7 NO A gt i 8 S3 oder S7 S S3 NC or S7 NO g S4 S oder S8 S S4 NO or S8 NO p amp p S S4 oder S8 S S4
97. 480 150 130 40 140 120 190 Siemens LV 30 2004 Project planning aids 3WN6 circuit breakers withdrawable version 4 pole Front connection Q SA2 5331b L3 L241 SA2 5431a N Single hole 630 to 1600 A DD SA2 5433a Rated current a b ic d iS 630 1000 60 8 390 408 1250 1600 60 45 390 408 2000 80 40 20 420 445 2500 3200 100 50 20 420 445 Guide frame Switchboard door Slots 6 mm deep 3 5 mm wide for line side phase barriers Center line of operator panel For safety clearances see Page 5 117 Double hole 630 to 1600 A Holes in bars to DIN 43673 b e120 be 120e 120 13 5 Single hole 2000 to 3200 A SA2 5434a 40 iol lo ol lo 1 A O o oM oms Jae Re L 4 a120 gt a 120 120 313 5 Double hole 2000 to 3200 A Holes in bars to DIN 43673 3WN6 circuit breakers 3 and 4 pole Door cut out for operator panel using the door sealing frame m 40 Mao 40 4 i RS Mounting surface 3holes dia 5 5 mm on 5 122 Door cut out with edge protector Cut out after mounting the edge protector _ m ash 340 205 MOXm 0 40
98. 75 000 Il 1250 1250 80 B 3WL12 12 30041 1 unit 75 000 Il 1600 1600 80 B 3WL12 16 30041 1 unit 75 000 Il 2000 2000 55 B 3WL12 20 20041 1unit 75 000 80 B 3WL12 20 30041 tunit 75 000 2500 2500 B awiz 25 20041 1 unit 71 000 n B 3WL12 25 30041 tunit 71 000 3200 3200 B 3WL12 32 30041 tunit 77 000 Front main circuit connection single hole l 630 630 50 B 3WL11 06 20043 1 unit 50 000 B 3WL11 06 30043 1 unit 50 000 800 800 50 B 3WL11 08 20043 1 unit 50 000 B 3WL11 08 30043 1 unit 50 000 1000 1000 50 B 3WL11 10 201043 1unit 50 000 65 B 3WL11 10 301043 1 unit 50 000 1250 1250 50 B 3WL11 12 20043 1unit 50 000 65 B 3WL11 12 30043 1 unit 50 000 1600 1600 50 B 3WL11 16 20043 1unit 50 000 65 B 3WL11 16 30043 1 unit 50 000 Il 800 800 80 B 3WL12 08 30043 1 unit 67 000 Il 1000 1000 80 B 3WL12 10 30043 1 unit 67 000 Il 1250 1250 80 B 3WL12 12 3043 1 unit 67 000 Il 1600 1600 80 B 3WL12 16 30043 1 unit 67 000 Il 2000 2000 55 B 3WL12 20 20043 1unit 67 000 80 B 3WL12 20 30043 1 unit 67 000 2500 2500 65 B Swri2 25 20043 tunit 71 000 a B 3WL12 25 30043 tunit 71 000 3200 3200 B 3WL12 32 30043 tunit 77 000 Front main circuit connection double hole 630 630 50 B 3WL11 06 20044 1 unit 50 000 B 3WL11 06 30044 1 unit 50 000 l 800 800 50 B 3WL11 08 20044 1 unit 50 000 B 3W
99. 8 NSK 5907a y drill when using door interlocking Siemens LV 30 2004 Cut out when the circuit breaker is installed in a switchgear cabinet and with the door arranged centrally Section width Fixed mounted Withdrawable b b 400 275 292 500 275 290 600 275 288 Accessories for 3WN6 circuit breakers 3 and 4 pole Mutual mechanical interlocking 1 locking device to prevent closing 2 consisting of lock in the control cabinet door and interlock module with Bowden wire For withdrawable circuit breakers For fixed mounted circuit breakers Clearance for interlock module without Bowden wire ax lt b gt Project planning aids NS1 5355a NS1 5356a nii O Clearance for a b ic d E 1 90 90 50 65 270 2 58 215 10 250 115 3WX31 56 1J 01 storage device and enclosure for voltage transformer for measurement module for shunt release 118 2 Mounting feet Standard mounting rail to EN 50022 35 Current transformer for neutral conductor overload protection and ground fault protection for sizes and Il 38WX36 43 1 00 Locking device for electrical ON and mechanical OFF buttons NSK5908 eG NS1 5334a ha 105 Current trans Current Size A B Cc D E former trans approx former p
100. 8 30045 1 unit 75 000 Il 1000 1000 80 B 3WL12 10 30045 1 unit 75 000 Il 1250 1250 80 B 3WL12 12 301045 1 unit 75 000 Il 1600 1600 80 B 3WL12 16 30045 1 unit 75 000 Il 2000 2000 55 B 3WL12 20 20045 tunit 75 000 80 B 3WL12 20 30045 1 unit 75 000 Il 2500 2500 55 B 3WL12 25 20045 tunit 76 000 80 B 3WL12 25 30045 1 unit 76 000 Il 3200 3200 5 80 B 3WL12 32 30045 1 unit 82 000 630 630 50 B 3WL11 06 20046 1unit 84 000 65 B 3WL11 06 30046 1 unit 84 000 l 800 800 50 B 3WL11 08 20046 1unit 84 000 65 B 3WL11 08 30046 1 unit 84 000 1000 1000 50 B 3WL11 10 20046 tunit 84 000 65 B 3WL11 10 30046 1 unit 84 000 1250 1250 50 B 3WL11 12 201046 tunit 84 000 65 B 3WL11 12 30046 1 unit 84 000 1600 1600 50 B 3WL11 16 201046 tunit 84 000 65 B 3WL11 16 30046 1 unit 84 000 Il 800 800 80 B 3WL12 08 30046 1 unit 109 000 Il 1000 1000 80 B 3WL12 10 30046 1 unit 109 000 Il 1250 1250 80 B 3WL12 12 30046 1 unit 109 000 Il 1600 1600 80 B 3WL12 16 30046 1 unit 109 000 Il 2000 2000 55 B 3WL12 20 20046 1 unit 109 000 80 B 3WL12 20 30046 1 unit 109 000 Il 2500 2500 55 B 3WL12 25 20046 q1 unit 123 000 80 B 3WL12 25 30046 1 unit 123 000 Il 3200 3200 80 B 3WL12 32 30046 1 unit 136 000 l 630 630 50 B 3WL11 06 20047 1unit 84 000 65 B 3WL11 06 30047 1 unit 84 000 8
101. 9 111 0AN35 0AA0 tunit on req Size II up to 3200 A B 3WL9111 0AN36 0AAO tunit on req Size III up to 5000 A B 3WL9111 0AN37 0AAO tunit on req Connecting flange Size I up to 1000 A B 3WL9111 0AN24 0AAO junit on req Size 1250 A 1600 A B 3WL9111 0AN25 0AAO unit on req Size II up to 2000 A B 3WL9111 0AN26 0AAO tunit on req Size II up to 2500 A B 3WL9 111 0AN27 0AA0 unit on req 3 Size II up to 3200 A B 3WL9 111 0AN28 0AA0 tunit on req 7 Size III up to 4000 A B 3WL9111 0AN31 0AAO tunit on req When using front accessible main circuit connections 3WL9 111 0AN24 0AA0 withdrawable circuit breakers supports are required This quantity or a multiple thereof can be ordered Siemens LV 30 2004 5 53 Circuit Breakers Non Automatic Circuit Breakers up to 6300 A SENTRON WL Accessories spare parts Designation DT Order No PS Weight per PU approx kg For converting fixed mounted circuit breakers to withdrawable circuit breakers Guide frames and sliding contact modules must be ordered separately 3 pole Size B 3WL9 111 0BC11 0AA0 1unit on req Size Il B 3WL9111 0BC12 0AA0 1unit on req Size III B 3WL9 111 0BC13 0AA0 1unit on req 4 pole Size B 3WL9 111 0BC14 0AA0 1unit on req Size Il B 3WL9111 0BC15 OAAO 1unit on req Size III B 3WL9 111 0BC16 0AA0 1unit on req Auxiliary contacts Specified for each connection depending on the number of poles on the circuit breaker order 3 or 4 units
102. AB03 0AAO junit on req or guide frame SIGUT Screwless type terminals B 3WL9 111 0AB04 0AA0O junit on req tension spring Coding kit for fixed mounting X5 to X8 B 3WL9111 0AB07 0AAO junit on req 8 Sliding contact module for guide frame B 3WL9111 OAB08 0AAO junit onreq g Blanking block for circuit breakers B 3WL9 111 0AB12 0AA0 junit on req i 3WL9 111 OAB03 0AAO Closing solenoid shunt release DC 24V 100 ON time B 3WL9 111 0AD01 0AA0 1 unit on req DC 30V B 3WL9 111 0AD02 0AA0 1 unit on req DC 48V B 3WL9 111 0AD03 0AA0 1 unit on req 3 DC 60V B 3WL9 111 0AD04 0AA0 1 unit on req 5 DC 110 V AC 110 V B 3WL9 111 0AD05 0AA0 1 unit onreq 2 DC 220 V AC 230 V B 3WL9 111 0AD06 0AA0 1 unit on req DC 24V 5 ON time B 3WL9111 0AD11 OAAO 1 unit onreq SWL9 111 0AB04 0AA0 pc 48v B 3WL9111 0AD12 0AAO 1 unit on req DC 110 125 V AC 110 127 V B 3WL9111 0AD13 0AAO unit onreq DC 220 250 V AC 208 240 V B 3WL9111 0AD14 0AAO 1 unit onreq Undervoltage releases instantaneous DC 24V B 3WL9111 OAE01 0AAO unit onreq DC 30V B 3WL9111 OAE02 0AAO unit onreq DC 48V B 3WL9111 OAE03 0AAO 1 unit onreq gt DC 110 125 V AC 110 127 V B 3WL9111 OAE04 0AAO unit onreq Olg DC 220 250 V AC 208 240 V B 3WL9 111 0AE05 0AA0 unit on req x lt 2 AC 380 415 V B 3WL9111 OAE06 0AAO 1 unit on req 5 delayed DC 48V B 3WL9 111 0AE11 0AA0 1 unit on req DC 110 125 V AC 110 127 V B 3WL9 111 0AE12 0AA0 1 unit on req 3WL9 111 0AB07 OAA0 DC 22
103. AC 690 V without electronic trip unit system Size Rated current J rated currentZy j 1000A tunit 36 000 1600 A 1 unit 38 000 Il 2000 A 1 unit 59 000 2500 A 1 unit 61 000 3200 A 1 unit 63 000 Installation type Main circuit connections see Page 5 85 Withdrawable Withdrawable circuit breaker without guide frame 7 gesign Withdrawable circuit breaker with guide frame 8 Other Standard version Rear versions of the horizontal terminals with guide rails guide frame up to 1000 A 27 000 see Page 5 110 1250 A 1600 A 23 000 2000 A 35 000 2500 A 37 000 3200 A 37 000 Circuit breakers also available with rated short time withstand current 11th to Tew 50 kA 1 s see Page 5 105 16th positions of the Order No see Page 5 130 This quantity or a multiple thereof can be ordered Siemens LV 30 2004 Non Automatic Circuit Breakers up to 3200 A Discontinued Series 4 pole fixed mounted design Version Rated operating voltage U up to AC 690 V without electronic trip unit system PS Size Size Rated current J rated current 7000 A 1600 A Il 2000 A 2500 A 3200 A Installation type Main circuit connections see Page 5 85 Fixed mounted Main circuit connections rear horizontal standard 6 Main circuit connections accessible from front 3 single hole at top and bottom up to 1000 A 1250 A 1600 A 2000 A 2500 A 3200 A Main circuit connections accessible from front 2 do
104. Air Circuit Breakers ACBs Introduction Circuit breakers non automatic circuit breakers up to 6300 A SENTRON WL General data 3 pole fixed mounted design 3 pole withdrawable design 4 pole fixed mounted design 4 pole withdrawable design Options Accessories spare parts Project planning aids Circuit breakers approved acc to UL 489 up to 5000 A SENTRON WL General data 3 pole fixed mounted design 3 pole withdrawable design Accessories spare parts Non automatic circuit breakers for DC up to 4000 A SENTRON WL General data 3 and 4 pole fixed mounted design 3 and 4 pole withdrawable design Accessories spare parts Project planning aids Circuit breakers up to 3200 A discontinued series General data 3 pole fixed mounted design 3 pole withdrawable design 4 pole fixed mounted design 4 pole withdrawable design Options Accessories spare parts Project planning aids Non automatic circuit breakers up to 3200 A discontinued series 3 pole fixed mounted design 3 pole withdrawable design 4 pole fixed mounted design 4 pole withdrawable design Options Siemens LV 30 2004 Air Circuit Breakers ACBs Introduction E Overview Size Circuit breakers non automatic circuit breakers up to 6300 A SENTRON WL Rated current Jn Number of poles Rated operating voltage U Rated ultimate short circuit breaking capacity at AC 415 V Endurance Service position D
105. C filter FBO b Co Delivery as of July 2004 F 1 Not possible with PROFIBUS communication interface option order code FO2 2 Overexcited i e closing time 25 ms standard 60 ms 3 For further information see Section Communication capable circuit break ers 4 Additional voltage transformers are required for connection of the mea surement function see Page 5 51 5 If ordering withdrawable circuit breaker and guide frame separately spec ify order code F02 for withdrawable circuit breaker only Siemens LV 30 2004 5 38 Circuit Breakers Non Automatic Circuit Breakers up to 6300 A SENTRON WL Add Z to the complete Order No and Order No with Z indicate the appropriate order code s 1234567 8 9101112 13141516 B8WL 2 and additional order code s ooo0 Code for Further versions Z Order Order code code for for withdraw fixed moun able version ted version Interlocks covers position indicator switches Mutual mechanical interlocking Interlocking module Fixed mounted circuit breaker SISS CLO with Bowden wire 2 m For withdrawable circuit breaker RI515 with guide frame For guide frame RI5 6 For withdrawable circuit breaker RI517 Arc chute cover 3 pole Size R 110 Size II RI 110 Size III R10 4 pole Size R10 Size II RITO Size III R10 Shutters 3 pole 2 parts Size T Ri2 lockable Size II wi
106. CDE 315A 0 A 1 unit C 3WX36 43 1CA00 1unit on req 3 pole circuit breakers H J 400 A 0 B C 3WX36 43 1CB00 1unit on req 500 A 0 C C 3WX36 43 1CC00 1 unit on req 630 A 0 D C 3WX36 43 1CD00 1unit on req 315A 1 E 1 unit C 3WX36 43 1CE00 1unit on req 1000 A 2 F C 3WX36 43 1CF00 1 unit on req 1250 A 3 G C 3WX36 43 1CG00 1 unit on req 1600 A 4 H C 3WX36 43 1CH00 1 unit on req 1250 A 5 G 1 unit C 3WX36 43 1FG00 1 unit on req 1600 A 5 H C 3WX36 43 1FH00 1 unit on req 2000 A 5 J C 3WX36 43 1FJ00 1unit on req 2500 A 6 K C 3WX36 43 1FK00 tunit on req 3200 A 7 M C 3WX36 43 1FM00 1unit on req For 4 pole circuit breakers N P 630 A 0 D 1 unit C 3WX36 43 2BA00 1 uni 3 000 the fourth current transformer is fitted 800 A 1 E internally If electronic trip unit version 1000 A 2 F E is chosen for 4 pole circuit break 1250 A 3 G ers the fourth current transformer 1600 A 4 H must De moumediexternally and be 2000 A 5 J tunit C 3WX36 43 2FA00 junit 3 000 selected from the table opposite 2500 A 6 K 3200 A 7 M Direct detection of ground fault current by means of a current transformer in the grounded neu tral point of the transformer Current transformers for 3 and C E P J 315A 0 A 1 unit C 3WX36 43 1CA00 1unit on req 4 pole circuit breakers 3 pole 400A 0 B C 3WX36 43 1CB00 1unit on req ERJ 500 A 0 C C 3WX36 43 1CC00 1 unit on req 4 pole 630 A 0 D C 3WX36 43 1CD00 1unit on req 800 A 1 E 1 unit C 3WX36 43 1CE00 1 unit on re
107. Castell S 0 5 Sol5 ade by KIRK Key m S O 6 CL m S06 ounting set for padlocks S017 Slol7 ade by Ronis Sols Sos ade by Profalux EOR SIO9 EMERGENCY STOP button ushroom head pushbutton instead of he mechanical OFF button BAK F Clo S2 4 Locking device against ade by CES R6 unauthorized closing for withdrawable circuit breakers aaeby IKON Rl 6 3 The disconnector unit fulfills the require ade by Ronis R618 ments for main circuit breakers to ade by Profalux RIGO EN 60204 VDE 0113 consisting of a lock in the cabinet door ade by KIRK Key m R 6 6 active in the connected position the function is retained when the circuit breaker is replaced Locking device for operating mechanism hand lever SISIB CIT s 3 3 with padlock Locking device to prevent ade by CES SZO movement or the withdrawable ade by IKON SIZIB Safety lock for fitting to circuit breaker ade by O M R m S 7 7 ade by Profalux SIZ 5 ade by Ronis S716 ade by KIRK Key m S 7 4 Locking devices Locking device to prevent ade by CES RI8 1 movement of the withdrawable _ circuit breaker ade by KON RIB 3 in disconnected position ade by O M R m R84 consisting of Bowden wire and lock ade by Profalux RI8 5 in the cabinet door ade by Ronis 7 Ris 6 ounting set for padlocks R88 Locking device o prevent opening of the cabinet SIBIO door in ON position fixed mounted version in connected position withdrawable version
108. Hv TWAT coe OHS rn Setting range for delay time fgg M 100 200 300 400 ms M 80 4000 ms M 80 4000 ms Switchable short time delayed short circuit protection v v v I t dependent function Setting range for delay time tg at 1t 100 200 300 400 ms 100 400 ms 100 400 ms Zone Selective Interlocking function by CubicleBUS module by CubicleBUS module by CubicleBUS module Instantaneous short circuit protection v v v Function can be switched on off v v v Setting range Jj In x 1 5 2 2 3 4 6 8 10 12 0 8 x Ics Koine ORs oxime Oe cs Ground fault protection QO Module can be retrofitted Q Module can be retrofitted Q Module can be retrofitted Tripping and alarm function v v v Tripping function can be switched on off v v v Alarm function can be switched on off v v Detection of the ground fault current via summation cur s v v rent formation with internal or external neutral conductor transformer Detection of ground fault current via external transformer 4 v v Setting range of the operating current J g for release A B C D E AYE Ara E Setting range of the operating current Jg for alarm A B C D E A E AAE Setting range of the delay time ty 100 200 300 400 500 ms 100 500 ms 100 500 ms Switchable ground fault protection characteristic v v v P tdependent function Setting range for delay time fg at Pt 100 200 300 400 500 ms 100 500 ms 100 500 ms Zone Selective Interlocking G function by CubicleBUS module by CubicleBU
109. I 00S S Air Circuit Breakers ACBs 1 Ul Ul Circuit breakers approved acc utomatic circuit breakers 489 up to 5000 A up to 4000 A up to 3200 A discontinued SENTRON WL SENTRON WL 1000 1600 2000 2500 3000 1000 2000 4000 630 800 1000 1250 1600 2000 2500 3200 4000 5000 3 pole 3 pole 4 pole 3 pole 4 pole 3 pole 4 pole up to 600 Y 347 up to 690 up to 690 up to 1000 65 100 30 25 20 65 80 at DC 300 600 1000 V 20000 15000 10000 15000 20000 20000 30 430 30 30 30 430 30 30 30 430 30 30 30 430 30 30 L 4 4 4 NSEO_00061 NSEO_00062 NSE0_00061 NSEO_00062 NSEO_00061 NSEO_00062 NSE0_00061 NSE0_00062 IPSS IP54 IP54 IP20 IP20 IP20 For dimensions see Fixed mounted Withdrawable Fixed mounted Withdrawable Fixed mounted Withdrawable circuit breakers f 460 590 460 590 300 390 280 370 400 520 380 500 non automatic circuit breakers 434 465 5 470 485 470 485 up to 6300 A SENTRON WL 291 471 330 445 330 445 Siemens LV 30 2004 5 3 SENTRON WL General data Overview SENTRON WL Superior individual products integrated into uniform power dis tribution systems up to and including industry specific indus trial and infrastructure solutions a a p o Guide frame Main connection front flange horizontal vertical Position indicator switch Grounding contact leading Shutter COM15 PROFIBUS module External CubicleBUS m
110. ING 3 EG ETU45B protection functions LSING with 4 line display FG Standard Order No supplements for further Order No supplements for circuit breakers and guide frames see Page 5 36 Manual operating mechanism with mechanical closing 1AA2 Without 1st and 2nd auxiliary release auxiliary switch 2NC 2NO Further Order No supplements see Page 5 36 Note max voltage for auxiliary circuits 240 V 1 Rated current determined by rated current module On the standard design the supplied module is equal to the max rated type current If a lower rated current is required adaptation by order code on page 5 76 2 Current transformers for vectorial summation current formation or for pro tection of the neutral conductor and current transformers for detection of the ground fault current in the grounded star point of the transformer should be ordered separately see Pages 5 37 and 5 46 3 ETU45B with ground fault protection module GFM AT alarm and tripping see Page 5 76 5 74 Siemens LV 30 2004 This quantity or a multiple thereof can be ordered Circuit Breakers Approved acc to UL 489 up to 5000 A SENTRON WL Accessories spare parts H selection and ordering data Guide frame for circuit breakers approved to UL 489 Size Max rated circuit Guide frame for 3 pole PS Weight breaker current circuit breakers per PU Tn max approx A DT kg Front main circuit connection single hole 1000 B
111. J 630 A 252 630 A A 0 D 1 unit 47 000 1000 A 400 1000 A A 2 F 1 unit 47 000 1600 A 640 1600 A A 4 H 1 unit 49 000 II 2000 A 800 2000 A A 5 J 1 unit 70 000 2500 A 1000 2500 A A 6 K 1 unit 72 000 3200 A 1280 3200 A A i M 1 unit 74 000 Installation type Main terminals see Page 5 85 Fixed mounted Main terminals rear horizontal standard 6 Main connections accessible from front 3 single hole at top and bottom up to 1000 A 1250 A 1600 A 2000 A 2500 A 3200 A Main terminals accessible from front double hole at top and 2 bottom holes in accordance with DIN 43673 up to 1000 A 1250 A 1600 A 2000 A 2500 A 3200 A Electronic Version V zn 0 v a Version B azn 0 B functional Version G aznNg 0 G SPN Version D aznN age Basic functions with LCD display 1 Basic functions and additional functions 2 7 with LCD display Version E aznNg Basic functions with LCD display 1 E Basic functions and additional functions 2 7 E with LCD display Version F aznNg Basic functions with LCD display O E Basic functions and additional functions 2 7 F with LCD display Version H aznN 1 4 Basic functions and additional functions 2 7 H Version J aznNg Basic functions and additional functions 2 im g Version K aznNg Basic functions and additional functions 2 im i Version N aznN Basic functions and additional functions 2 7 N Version P aznNg Basic functions and additional functions 2 7 P Circui
112. L11 08 30044 1 unit 50 000 1000 1000 50 B 3WL11 10 20044 tunit 50 000 65 B 3WL11 10 30044 1 unit 50 000 1250 1250 50 B 3WL11 12 20044 tunit 50 000 65 B 3WL11 12 30044 1 unit 50 000 1600 1600 50 B 3WL11 16 200044 tunit 50 000 65 B 3WL11 16 30044 1 unit 50 000 Il 800 800 80 B 3WL12 08 30044 1 unit 67 000 Il 1000 1000 80 B 3WL12 10 30044 1 unit 67 000 Il 1250 1250 80 B 3WL12 12 301044 1 unit 67 000 Il 1600 1600 80 B 3WL12 16 30044 1 unit 67 000 Il 2000 2000 55 B 3WL12 20 20044 tunit 67 000 80 B 3WL12 20 30044 1 unit 67 000 Il 2500 2500 55 B 3WL12 25 20044 tunit 71 000 80 B 3WL12 25 30044 1 unit 71 000 Il 3200 3200 80 B 3WL12 32 3044 1 unit 77 000 Non automatic circuit breakers Order No supplements Order No supplements without electronic trip unit AA AA without electronic trip unit communication AB AB measurement function optional a Electronic trip units Design without ground fault protection ETU15B protection functions LI BB BB ETU25B protection functions LSI CB CB ETU45B protection functions LSIN EB EB ETU45B protection functions LSIN with 4 line display FB FB ETUSSB protection functions LSIN JB JB ETU76B prot func LSIN with pixel graphics display NB NB Design with ground fault protection ETU27B protection functions LSING DG DG ETU45B protection functions LSING EG EG ETU45B prot functions L
113. Max rated operating current Ue DC mA Measuring accuracy of the electronic trip unit 24 20 Protection functions to EN 60947 current indication and communication function F01 5 measurement function F05 3 Position indicator switch on guide frame Type of contact Signal Rated insulation voltage U Rated operating voltage Ue Switching capacity Short circuit protection Transfer control device Circuit breaker in connected position Circuit breaker in test position Circuit breaker in disconnected position AC DC V v Rated operating current J T AC 1 A I AC 15 A DC 13 A Largest permissible DIAZED fuse operational class gL Largest permissible miniature circuit breaker with C characteristic 3 NO 3NC 1NO 1NC 2NO 2NC or 1NO 1NC 1NO 1NC 1NO 1NC 400 415 AC 240 DC 230 8 up to AC 240 V 3 up to AC 240 V 10 DC 24 V 5 DC 48 V 1 5 DC 115 V 0 6 DC 230 V 8 A TDz slow 8A Degree of protection Weight Voltage deviation Frequency deviation Contact transfer time Switchover time Return transfer time Break time Ambient temperature Storage temperature 1 Without any welding of the contacts only at J lt 1 kA in accordance with DIN VDE 0660 Part 200 IP40 approx 10 kg 0 20 55 x Ug not monitored 200 ms T1 adjustable 1 5 s 30 s 200 ms 200 ms T2 adjustable 5 s 100 s 65 ms 25 55 C 50 80 C Siemens LV 30 2004 5 99 Ci
114. N WL eE ELE Size 1 Manual operating mechanism with mechanical closing Closing Max force required to operate the hand lever N lt 230 charging stored energy Required number of strokes on the hand lever 9 feature Manual operating mechanism with mechanical and electrical closing Charging stored energy feature Closing solenoid CC Operating range So TO Extended operating range for battery operation for DC 24 V DC 48 V 0 126 DC 60 V DC 110 V DC 220 V Power input AC DC VA W 15 15 Minimum command duration rated voltage for the closing solenoid ms 60 Short circuit protection Fuse 1A Manual motorized operating mechanism with mechanical and electrical closing Manual operating mechanism Motor Operating range Soe MOS Extended operating range for battery operation for DC 24 V DC 48 V Was 126 7 DC 60 V DC 110 V DC 220 V Power input to motor AC DC VA W 110 110 Time required to charge the stored energy mechanism at 1 x rated S 10 voltage Closing solenoid For motor and Short circuit protection Fuse 2A closing solenoid Motor and closing solenoid for the same rated control supply voltages Smallest permissible fuse at 24 30 V 2A at 48 60 V 2A at 110 127 V 1A at 220 250 V 1A Electronic trip unit signals Measuring accuracy of the electronic trip unit protection functions to UL 489 Current indication lt 5 Measurement fun
115. N6 circuit breakers are supplied complete with an oper ating mechanism electronic trip unit and auxiliary switches and are fitted with auxiliary releases The non automatic circuit breakers are supplied without elec tronic trip unit Basic configuration e Electronic trip unit for overload protection and short circuit pro tection short circuit releases also delayed for time based dis crimination with LEDs for the cause of tripping LED status in dicator query and test button e Mechanical closing lockout e Tripped switch e Ready to close indicator with alarm switch e Auxiliary supply connector The circuit breaker is equipped with the required number of connectors e Rear horizontal connection of the main conductors Operating mechanisms see illustration Motorized operat ing mechanism The circuit breakers are available with various optional operat ing mechanisms e Manual operating mechanism with memory with mechanical closing e Manual operating mechanism with mechanical and electrical closing e Motorized operating mechanism that can also be operated manually with mechanical and electrical closing The operating mechanisms with electrical closing can be used for synchronization tasks Electronic trip units see illustration Electronic trip unit The electronic trip unit is controlled by a microprocessor and op erates independently of an external voltage It enables systems to be adapted to the differen
116. NTRON WL circuit breaker with J 1000 A and electronic trip unit ETU45B or ETU55B Inverse time delayed overload range L j 10000 NSE00604a T 1000 100 10 01 10000 100000 IA 100 1000 SENTRON WL circuit breaker with J 1000 A and electronic trip unit ETU45B or ETU55B Instantaneous short circuit range I 5 58 Siemens LV 30 2004 NSE00603a 10000 100000 I A 100 1000 SENTRON WL circuit breaker with J 1000 A and electronic trip unit ETU45B or ETU55B Ground fault protection range G t 10000 NSE00602b tIs 1000 100 10 01 10000 100000 I A 100 1000 SENTRON WL circuit breaker with J 1000 A and electronic trip unit ETU45B or ETU55B Short time delayed short circuit range S Ey Inverse time delayed overload range L Pt constant SS Overlapping of the inverse time delayed overload range L of Ptand Pt Hl Inverse time delayed overload range L It constant Wh Short time delayed short circuit range S Instantaneous short circuit range I Ground fault protection range G Further characteristics are shown in the manual and the plan ning and configuring tool SIMARIS deSign or ask your Siemens contact person Tolerances for the operating currents L tripping operations between 1 05 and 1 2 x Jp S 0 20 I 0 20 G 0 20 Tolerances for the tripping times L 20 0 S 0 60 ms l lt 50 ms G 0
117. PAA accessible from front Size Il up to 3200 A double hole Size III up to 4000 A Top Size I up to 1600 A accessible from front Size Il up to 2000 A single hole Size Il up to 2500 A P16 Bottom Size Il up to 3200 A rear horizontal Size Ill up to 4000 A Siemens LV 30 2004 5 41 Circuit Breakers Non Automatic Circuit Breakers up to 6300 A SENTRON WL Add Z to the complete Order No and Order Order No with Z indicate the appropriate order code s code 1234567 8 9101112 13141516 IW a sa Se ee SZ and additional order code s 000 Identification code for Further versions Z For withdrawable circuit breaker with guide frame Order code or guide frame for 3 and To select this connection system the 12th 4 pole digit of the Order No for the circuit breaker must be a 6 Connection system for main circuit connections Top Size I up to 1600 A accessible from front Size II up to 2000 A double hole Size II up to 2500 A Bottom Size Il up to 3200 A PIZ rear horizontal Size IIl up to 4000 A Top Size up to 1600 A rear vertical Size II up to 2000 A Bottom Size Il up to 2500 A rear horizontal Size Il up to 3200 A PHIS Size IIl up to 4000 A Size III up to 5000 A Top Size up to 1600 A connecting flange Size Il up to 2000 A Bottom Size II up to 2500 A rear horizontal Size II up to 3200 A PAIS Size III u
118. S module by CubicleBUS module Parameter set switchover Switchable between parameter set A and B A v LCD Alphanumeric LCD 4 line Q Graphical LCD 24 V external power supply required v Communication CubicleBUS integrated v A v Communication capable via PROFIBUS DP v A v Measurement function Measurement function capable with meas func v v v tion meas function Plus LED display Electronic trip unit active v A v Alarm v A v ETU fault v v A L release v A v S release A v A release v A v N release v A v G release x only with ground fault prot mod s only with ground fault prot mod s only with ground fault prot mod G alarm y only with ground fault prot mod v only with ground fault prot mod only with ground fault prot mod Release via extended protection functions v A v Communication v A v n Signals from signaling switches with external CubicleBUS modules optical or relays Overload warning v A v Load shedding load receiving A v A Leading signal overload release 200 ms v A v Temperature alarm A v A Phase unbalance v v A nstantaneous short circuit release v A v Short time delayed short circuit release v A v Overload release v v A Neutral conductor release v v A Ground fault protection release x only with ground fault prot mod v only with ground fault prot mod s only with ground fault prot mod Ground fault alarm xy o
119. SING with 4 line display FG FG ETUS5B protection functions LSING JG JG ETU76B prot func LSING with pixel graphics display NG NG Standard Order No supplements for further Order No supplements see Page 5 36 Manual operating mechanism with mechanical closing Without 15t and 2 auxiliary releases auxiliary switch 2 NC 2 NO 1AA2 1AA2 For footnotes see Page 5 33 5 32 Siemens LV 30 2004 This quantity or a multiple thereof can be ordered Circuit Breakers Non Automatic Circuit Breakers up to 6300 A SENTRON WL 4 pole fixed TA Ke XT o Size Max rated circuit breaker Rated current High switching capacity H 440 V PS Weight current Th Order Ne per PU Tn max approx A A kA DT kg Horizontal main circuit connection 800 800 100 B 3WL12 08 40042 1 unit 67 000 1000 1000 100 B 3WL12 10 40042 1 unit 67 000 1250 1250 100 B 3WL12 12 440042 1 unit 67 000 1600 1600 100 B 3WL12 16 40042 1 unit 67 000 2000 2000 100 B 3WL12 20 40042 1 unit 67 000 2500 2500 100 B 3WL12 25 40042 1 uni 71 000 3200 3200 100 B 3WL12 32 40042 1 uni 77 000 19 4000 4000 100 C 3WL13 40 40042 1 unit 106 000 15 5000 5000 100 C 3WL13 50 40042 1 unit 106 000 Vertical main circuit connection 800 800 100 B 3WL12 08 40041 1 uni 75 000 1000 1000 100 B 3WL12 10 40041 1 uni 75 000 1250 1250 100 B 3WL12 12 4010141
120. Siemens LV 30 2004 This quantity or a multiple thereof can be ordered Circuit Breakers up to 3200 A Discontinued Series Accessories spare parts Designation Size Number of poles Required order DT For 1 unit PS Weight quantity per per PU circuit breaker approx kg Conversion set 3 pole 1 unit A 3WX36 88 0GA00 1 unit on req from fixed mounted to 4 pole A 3WX36 88 OHA00 q unit on req ee 3 pole 1 unit A 3WX3688 0KA00 tunit on req single operating 4 pole A 3WX36 88 0LA00 1unit on req mechanism Designation For circuit breaker Rated current Size Number of Required order DT For 1 set PS Weight Type poles quantity per or 1 unit per PU circuit breaker approx kg For fixed mounted and withdrawable circuit breakers Main contact 3WN6 0 1 to 3WN6 2 1 up to 1000 A 3 pole 3 units B 3WY36 21 0AA00 1 uni 2 000 elements complete 3yng 0 1 Z KO3 up to 1000 A 3 pole 3 units B 3WY36 21 0AA10 1unit on req to 3WNE 2 1 Z KO3 3WNE6 0 3 to 3WN6 2 3 up to 1000 A 4 pole 4 units B 3WY36 21 O0AA00 1 uni 2 000 3WN6 0 3 Z KO3 up to 1000 A 4 pole 4 units B 3WY36 21 0AA10 1 unit on req to SWNBG 2 3 Z KO3 3WNG 3 1 to 83WN6 4 1 1250 1600 A 3 pole 3 units B 3WY36 21 0BA00 1 uni 3 000 3WNE6 3 3 to 83WN6 4 3 1250 1600 A 4 pole 4 units B 3WY36 21 0BA00 1 uni 3 000 3WN6 5 1 2000 A 3 pole 3 units B 3WY36 21 0DA00 1 uni 5 300 3WN6 5 3 2000 A 4 pole 4 units B
121. V 30 2004 5 129 Non Automatic Circuit Breakers up to 3200 A Discontinued Series Selection and ordering data ca ot eee 3SWN6881 OWABEB BEEE Operating Manual operating mechanism with stored energy feature with 05 mechanism mech closing WG Manual operating mechanism with stored energy feature with mechanical and electr closing Closing solenoid AC 50 60 Hz V DC V 4 24 24 11 48 48 14 60 15 110 127 110 125 16 220 240 220 250 18 Manual motor operated mechanism with stored energy feature with mechanical and electrical closing Motor Closing AC 50 60 Hz V DC V AC 50 60 Hz V DC V 24 24 24 51 48 48 48 54 60 60 55 110 127 110 125 24 71 110 127 110 125 48 74 110 127 110 125 60 75 110 127 110 125 110 127 110 125 56 110 127 110 125 220 240 220 250 78 220 240 220 250 24 81 220 240 220 250 48 84 220 240 220 250 60 85 220 240 220 250 110 127 110 125 86 220 240 220 250 220 240 220 250 58 1st auxiliary Without 1st auxiliary releases OA release Shunt release f F1 AC 50 60 Hz V DC V 24 24 1B 30 1E 48 48 1F 60 1G 110 127 110 125 1H 220 240 220 250 1K Undervoltage release r F3 instantaneous O ms short delay 200 ms AC 50 60 Hz V DC V 24 3B 48 3 F 60 3G 110 127 110 125 3H 220 240 220 250 3K 380 415 3M Undervoltage release rc F8 delayable 0 2 3 2 s AC 50 60 Hz V DC V 110 127 4H 220 240 4K 380 415 4M 2nd auxiliary With
122. WL9 111 0BC04 0AA0 1unit on req camen ore 1 m long for connection to SENTRON WL with COM15 B 3WL9 111 0BC02 0AA0 unit on req modules 2 m long for connection to SENTRON WL with COM15 B 3WL9 111 0BC03 0AA0 1 unit on req z eh Wid 14420AT 1S OAAO 2m long for connection to SENTRON WL without COM15 B 3WL9111 0BC05 0AAO 1 unit onreq SENTRON manual Detailed description of the communication functions for for communica SENTRON circuit breakers Installation connection com tion solutions missioning and description of Switch ES Power and BDA German X E20001 A201 P307 1 unit on req English X E20001 A201 P307 X 7600 1 unit on req Free download under www siemens de energieverteilung Voltage transformer 3 pole 4 A for SENTRON WL 230 V 100 V class 0 5 B 3WL9 111 0BB70 0AA0 tunit on req with measurement 380 440 V 100 V class 0 5 B 3WL9 111 0BB63 0AA0 1 unit on req function and mea 500 690 V 100 V class 0 5 B 3WL9 111 0BB64 0AA0 1unit on req surement function s41 E5 NSE01026 Plus 3WL9 111 0AT16 0AA0 Retrofitting and spare parts a i PROFIBUS Retrofit kit for PROFIBUS communication including B 3WL9 111 0AT12 0AA0 1 unit on req retrofit kit COM15 BSS and set of cables for all SENTRON WL circuit breakers with ETU45B ETU55B and ETU76B trip units COM15 PROFIBUS module B 3WL9 111 0AT15 0AA0 1 unit on req Breaker status sensor BSS B 3WL9 111 0AT16 0AA0 1 unit on req Measurement function without voltage transformer B 3WL9 111 0AT02 0AA0 1
123. a external v transformer tg Setting range of the operating current Jg for release A B C D E Setting range of the operating current Ig for alarm A B C D E Meenas Setting range of the delay time ty 100 200 300 400 500 ms Switchable ground fault protection characteristic gt v I tdependent function Setting range for delay time tg at rt 100 200 300 400 500 ms Zone Selective Interlocking function by CubicleBUS Modul LCD Alphanumeric LCD 4 line Q Communication CubicleBUS integrated Communication capable via PROFIBUS DP Measurement function Meas func capable with meas func meas func Plus LED display Electronic trip unit active A Alarm v mM ETU fault v L release v S release v release v NSE00890 N release a G release only with ground fault protec module G alarm only with ground fault protec module Release via extended protection function Communication Signals from signaling switches with external CubicleBUS modules optical or relays Overload warning Load shedding load receiving Leading signal overload release 200 ms Temperature alarm Phase unbalance Instantaneous short circuit release Short time delayed short circuit release Overload release NSE00891 Neutral conductor release Ground fault protection release Ground fault alarm Auxiliary relay only with ground fault protec module only with ground fault protec mod
124. aker see Page 5 112 With locking with safety lock Made by CES Siei device consisting Normal lock no SSG 10 of lock in the cabi Made by IKON net door and inter Normal lock no 360012 K1 isles CH lock module with Bowden wire 1 5 m to prevent unautho rized closing of the circuit breaker Mounting set for CASTELL lock Sl6 5 Interlock to be obtained from the lock manufac turer CASTELL lock FS 2 Mounting set for FORTRESS lock SAL Interlock to be obtained from the lock manufac turer FORTRESS lock H31LH AC 65 standard NSS0_00559 LLLI Arc chute up to 1600 A Size Are chu CIS jean i 2000 3200 V Size II For withdrawable circuit breaker Locking with safety lock Made by CES device Normal lock no SSG 10 Sizi O11 to prevent move ment of the with ade by IKON drawable circuit Normal lock no 360012 K1 S17 3 ro breaker a safety lock prevents open ing of the crank ace Dy FnolaiiK S715 Poo hole ade by Ronis SI7I6 Poo 1 New technical design since 01 July 1998 previously order code S55 2 Required for protection against flashover at voltages gt 415 V Not to be used with vertical front accessible main circuit connections 5 106 Siemens LV 30 2004 Circuit Breakers up to 3200 A Discontinued Series
125. al without maintenance Operating cycles 10000 10000 10000 mechanical with maintenance Operating cycles 20000 20000 15000 electrical without maintenance Operating cycles 4000 4000 4000 Operating frequency 1 h 60 60 60 Minimum interval ms 80 80 80 between tripping operation by electronic trip unit and next making operation of the circuit breaker only with autom mechanical resetting of the lockout device Minimum dimension Circuit breaker section 3 pole mm 400 x 460 x 380 400 x 460 x 380 500 x 460 x 380 width x height x depth Service position 30 30 30 30 and z or NSE0_00061 NSE0_00062 l NSE00927 Main conductor Qty 2 2 2 minimum mm 6 4 x 76 2 6 4 x 76 2 6 4 x 102 cross sections or inches 1 4 x 3 1 4x3 1 4x 4 Auxiliary conductors Cu Standard connection strain relief clamp Max no of without end sleeve 2 x 0 5 mm AWG 20 2 x 1 5 mm AWG 16 1 x 2 5 mm AWG 14 auxiliary conductors x cross with end sleeve to 1x 0 5 mm AWG 20 1 x 1 5 mm AWG 16 section solid stranded DIN 46228 Part 2 with twin end sleeve 2 x 0 5 mm AWG 20 2 x 1 5 mm AWG 16 Optional connection tension spring without end sleeve 2 x 0 5 mm AWG 20 2 x 2 5 mm AWG 14 with end sleeve to 2 x 0 5 mm AWG 20 2 x 1 5 mm AWG 16 DIN 46228 Part 2 Weights 3 pole Fixed mounted circuit breaker kg 43 43 56 Withdrawable circuit breaker kg 45 45 60 Guide frame kg 25 25 31 1 Make time via activation solenoid for synch
126. and withdrawable circuit breakers e Protective measures against arcing gases For 3WN6 circuit breakers with voltages up to AC 415 V screening from vertical busbars is not necessary In the case of voltages up to AC 690 V the arc chute cover accessory can be used to protect against flashover Electrical add on devices on the side of the circuit breaker must be separately covered Also see notes under Project planning aids Dimension drawings e Operator panel The operator panel is designed to protrude from a cutout in the door providing access to all operator controls and displays with the door closed e Door sealing frame The door sealing frame seals the cabinet door with the operator panel With the cabinet door closed the IP degree of protection is achieved for the circuit breaker Siemens LV 30 2004 5 84 Withdrawable circuit breaker The withdrawable version comprises a withdrawable circuit breaker a guide frame and a hand crank for moving the with drawable circuit breaker The guide frames are fitted with guide rails as standard for easy handling of the withdrawable circuit breaker e Auxiliary supply connections The auxiliary supply connections make contact automatically when the circuit breaker slides into the guide frame test posi tion connected position e Switch positions in the guide frame The withdrawable version has three switch positions in the switchgear cabinet behind the cabinet door Conn
127. ated Cak to prevent opening of the cabinet door Guide frames B 3WL9 111 0BB13 0AA0 junit on req 3WL9 111 OBA71 OAAO can be defeated to prevent movement of circuit breaker when Guide frames B 3WL9 111 0BB15 0AA0 junit on req cabinet door is open Interlocking Mutual mechanical interlocking Fixed mounted circuit breaker B 3WL9 111 0BB21 0AA0 unit on req J ERS with 2000 mm Bowden wire NSE00986 one required for each circuit breaker Module for withdrawable B 3WL9111 0BB24 0AAO 1 unit on req 3WL9 111 OBA76 0AAO circuit breaker with frame When ordered separately Module for guide frame B 3WL9111 0BB22 0AA0 1 unit onreq Module for withdrawable circuit B 3WL9111 0BB23 0AA0 1 unit on req breaker Adapter for size III Withdrawable circuit breaker B 3WL9111 0BB30 0AAO 1 unit on req 2000 mm B 3WL9 111 0BB25 0AA0 junit on req 3000 mm B 3WL9 111 0BB26 0AA0 unit on req B B 4500 mm 3WL9 111 0BB27 0AAO unit on req 6000 mm 3WL9 111 0BB28 0AAO junit on req nseoose9 gt 3WL9 111 0BB21 0AA0 1 Locks must be ordered from the manufacturer 2 Padlock not included in the scope of supply E Start of delivery on request This quantity or a multiple thereof can be ordered Siemens LV 30 2004 5 47 Circuit Breakers Non Automatic Circuit Breakers up to 6300 A SENTRON WL Accessories spare parts Designation DT
128. c d E f g h i k m n p A 630 1000 390 410 90 8 60 30 8 530 18 40 390 428 150 1250 1600 390 410 ome 15 60 30 15 5380 18 40 390 428 150 2000 520 540 120 15 80 40 40 20 560 22 44 520 S52 200 2500 3200 520 540 120 30 80 40 40 20 560 22 44 520 sem 200 Siemens LV 30 2004 5 120 Project planning aids 3WN6 circuit breakers withdrawable version 4 pole Horizontal connection SA2 5427a Vertical connection SA2 5429a b c L3 L2 6 L1 N SA2 5326b SA2 5428a 4 i L il 1 j i TA RES 9 25 3 5 ke Ley alia 14 e ma Ca C eet CY 408 15 430 a Disconnected position b Test position c Connected position Auxiliary conductor plug in system Guide frame Switchboard door Slots 6 mm deep for line side phase barriers Holes for attaching the guide frame Center line of operator panel For safety clearances see Page 5 117 L3 L2 6 L1 N SA2 5329a SA2 5430a 4 o GIACC db ld ld ldt Ad 777A RSS de ne n 0 h me i Rated current a b G d f h i k m n o p A 630 1000 370 410 90 8 60 30 455 470 157 5 115 37 90 90 140 1250 1600 370 410 ome 15 60 30 455 Krom 157 5 RISE 37 90 90 140 2000 500 540 120 15 80 40 465 480 157 5 115 40 140 120 190 2500 3200 500 540 120 30 100 50 465
129. c functions and additional functions 2 7 N Version P aznNg Basic functions and additional functions 2 7 E Circuit breakers also available with rated short time withstand current 11th to Tow 50 kA 1 s see Page 5 105 16th positions of the Order No see Page 5 104 1 Current transformers for overload protection in the neutral conductor and current transformers for ground fault protection must be ordered sepa rately see Page 5 108 2 A hand held device or the Win3WN6 software is required for operation 5 100 Siemens LV 30 2004 This quantity or a multiple thereof can be ordered Circuit Breakers up to 3200 A Discontinued Series 3 pole withdrawable design Version DT PS Weight per PU approx Rated operating voltage U up to AC 690 V SWN6HH1 BE REE SEee kg Size Size Rated current Adjustment range of rated current setting current J In l 630 A 252 630A A 0 D 1 unit 49 000 1000 A 400 1000 A A 2 F 1 unit 36 000 1600 A 640 1600 A A 4 H 1 unit 38 000 Il 2000 A 800 2000 A A 5 J 1 unit 59 000 2500 A 1000 2500 A A 6 K 1 unit 61 000 3200 A 1280 3200 A A 7 M 1 unit 63 000 Installation type Main terminals see Page 5 85 Additional weight for guide frame Withdrawable Withdrawable circuit breaker without guide frame 7 without design Withdrawable circuit breaker with guide frame 8 Other Standard design rear versions of the horizontal terminals with guide rails guide frame up to 1000 A 27 000 see Page 5 110
130. circuit protection AC DC V PPa Pibg Largest permissible DIAZED fuse operational class gL gG Largest permissible miniature circuit breaker with C characteristic 400 V 400 V up to 24 110 10 10 6 6 24 48 10 8 10 4 10 A TDz 16 A Dz 10A 220 230 380 400 10 10 6 4 110 220 3 5 1 1 2 0 4 Ready to close signaling switch S7 and tripped signaling switch S11 to DIN VDE 0630 Switching capacity AC 50 60 Hz Rated operating voltage U Rated operating current Ie Rated operating voltage Ue Rated operating current Te DC Short circuit protection Tripped signaling switch S11 Signal duration after tripping 1 The operating range is only permissible for the specified rated voltages and corresponds to the battery charging voltage 2 Without any welding of the contacts only at J lt 1 kA in accordance with DIN VDE 0660 Part 200 Siemens LV 30 2004 5 98 IPs 1S Largest permissible DIAZED fuse operational class gL 10 220 0 14 0 1 24 220 0 2 0 1 2 A Dz quick continuous until reset Electronic trip unit signals via optocou per o Circuit Breakers up to 3200 A Discontinued Series General data Electronic trip unit signals uP fault 0 alarm leading tripped signaling a g alarm Zone Selective Interlocking load monitoring After activation of the electronic trip unit it sends a sig nal contactless via optocoupler Max rated operating voltage Ue DC V
131. connected connected closed open Test NSE01036 NSE01040 1 Auxiliary circuit 2 Main circuit 3 Control cabinet door 4 Shutter Mutual mechanical circuit breaker interlocking The module for mutual mechanical interlocking can be used for one or two SENTRON WL circuit breakers and can be adapted easily to the corresponding versions The fixed mounted and withdrawable circuit breaker versions are fully compatible and can therefore be used in a mixed configuration in an installation This also applies to circuit breakers 3BWN6 and 3WN1 The circuit breakers can be mounted alongside each other or one above the other whereby the spacing of the circuit breakers is determined solely by the length of the Bowden cable The Bowden cables are supplied in standard lengths of 2 m Inter lock signals are looped through via the Bowden cables Inter locking is only effective in the connected position in the case of withdrawable circuit breakers The mechanical lifetime of the Bowden wires is 10 000 operating cycles Also see the following table for mutual mechanical interlocking of circuit breakers Phase barriers The plant engineering company can manufacture phase barriers made of insulating material for the arcing fault barriers The rear panel of the fixed mounted circuit breakers or guide frames are equipped with guide grooves Arc chute cover The arc chute cover is available as optional equipment for the guide frame standard for
132. continuous command 100 duty ratio locks out on momentary contact commands Extended operating range for battery operation Rated control supply voltage Us Power input Minimum command duration at Us Opening time of circuit breaker at Us 100 Short circuit protection for DC 24 V DC 30 V DC 48 V DC 60 V DC 110 V DC 220 V AC 50 60 Hz V DC V AC DC VA W ms AC DC ms Smallest permissible DIAZED fuse operational class gL miniature circuit breaker with C characteristic With Rated control supply stored energy voltage Us oor consist Operating range f release and Power input 3WX31 56 1J 01 storage device 1 The operating range is only permissible for the specified rated voltages and corresponds to the battery charging voltage 2 Storage time maximum time after which tripping by the shunt release is still assured after loss of the auxiliary voltage supply The precondition for this is that the stored energy feature was fully charged 3 Recharging time minimum time for recharging the stored energy feature after tripping by the shunt release AC 50 60 Hz V DC V AC DC VA W Storage time at Us recharging time at Us Opening time of circuit breaker short circuit protection 20 7 x Us circuit breaker is tripped OT ee TA xe Ug 0 7 1 26 x Us 110 127 220 240 24 48 60 110 125 220 250 15 60 lt 80 1 ATDz time lag 1 A 110 127 220 240 110 125 220 250 0 85 1 1
133. ctions base quantities lt 1 Measurement functions derived quantities lt 4 Auxiliary releases Shunt release ST F1 For continuous command Operating value Pickup gt 0 7 x rated voltage F2 100 ON time circuit breaker is tripped Closing solenoid locks out on momentary Operating range 85 110 contact commands Extended operating range for battery for DC 24 V DC 48 V 70 126 operation DC 60 V DC 110 V DC 220 V Rated voltage AC 50 60 Hz V 110 230 DC V 24 30 48 60 110 220 Power input AC DC VA W 15 15 Minimum command duration at rated ms 60 voltage Opening time of the circuit breaker AC DC ms 80 at rated voltage Short circuit protection 1A Smallest permissible fuse With stored energy feature Rated voltage AC 50 60 Hz V 110 230 consisting of shunt release DC V 110 220 and capacitor storage o device Operating range 85 O A Power input AC DC VAIW 1 1 Storage time recharging time at rated voltage max 5 min min 5s Opening time of circuit breaker short circuit protection ms 80 5 70 Siemens LV 30 2004 Circuit Breakers Approved acc to UL 489 up to 5000 A SENTRON WL General data Size Auxiliary releases Undervoltage release UVR F3 and UVR tg F4 Operating values pickup 2 0 85 x U circuit breaker can be closed 0 35 0 7 x Us circuit breaker dropout is tripped Operating range OMS 5 Ue Extended operating range for battery operation for DC 24 V DC 30 V
134. cuit breaker is used for communication this option is supplied as standard Ready to close signal switch The SENTRON WL circuit breakers are equipped with an optical ready to close indicator as standard In addition the ready to close status can be transmitted by means of a signal switch as an option If the switch is used for communication the signal switch is supplied as standard Locking devices Locking device in OFF position This function prevents closing of the circuit breaker and fulfills the specifications for main switches to EN 60204 VDE 0113 disconnector unit This lockout only affects this switch If the circuit breaker is replaced closing is no longer prevented unless the new circuit breaker is also protected against unautho rized closing To activate the locking device the circuit breaker must be opened The locking device is disabled when the circuit breaker is closed The lock is only activated when the key is removed The safety key can only be removed in the OFF position Locking device for electrical ON This prevents unauthorized electrical closing from the operator panel Mechanical closing and remote closing remain possible The lock is only activated when the key is removed Locking device for mechanical ON This prevents unauthorized mechanical closing The mechanical ON button can only be activated if the key is inserted key oper ation Closing with the electrical ON butt
135. d auxiliary release auxiliary switch 2NC 2NO Further Order No supplements see Page 5 36 Note max voltage for auxiliary circuits 240 V 1 Rated current determined by rated current module On the standard design the supplied module is equal to the max rated type current If a lower rated current is required adaptation by order code on page 5 76 2 Current transformers for vectorial summation current formation or for pro tection of the neutral conductor and current transformers for detection of the ground fault current in the grounded star point of the transformer should be ordered separately see Pages 5 37 and 5 46 3 ETU45B with ground fault protection module GFM AT alarm and tripping see Page 5 76 This quantity or a multiple thereof can be ordered Siemens LV 30 2004 5 73 Circuit Breakers Approved acc to UL 489 up to 5000 A SENTRON WL 3 pole withdrawable design Size Max rated Rated current Switching capacity 480 V PS Weight circuit breaker Jn per PU current Jy max approx A A kA DT kg Without guide frame for guide frames see Page 5 75 1000 1000 65 B 3WL51 10 30035 1 unit 45 000 1600 1600 65 B 3WL51 16 30035 1 unit 45 000 2000 2000 100 B 3WL52 20 40035 1 unit 60 000 2500 2500 100 B 3WL52 25 40035 1 unit 63 000 3000 3000 100 B 3WL52 30 40035 1 unit 68 000 ll 4000 4000 100 C 3WL53 40 40035 1 unit 88
136. data such as current values switching states reasons for tripping etc to central computers This makes it possible not only to monitor the circuit breakers but also to operate them remotely This supports energy management and significant savings in energy costs For further information see also section Communication capa ble circuit breakers Minimal power loss and therefore low energy consumption The low power consumption of the electrical components also saves money when it comes to purchasing the control power transformers Where space is at a premium or ventilation is limited E Area of application Specifications IEC 60947 2 DIN VDE 0660 Part 101 climate proof to IEC 68 Part 2 30 Approval according to maritime classification see Annex Operating conditions The 3WN6 circuit breakers are climate proof in accordance with DIN IEC 68 Part 2 30 They are intended for use in enclosed areas where no severe op erating conditions e g dust corrosive vapors damaging gases are present When installed in dusty or damp areas suitable enclosures must be provided If damaging gases e g hydrogen sulfide are present in the surrounding air sufficient incoming fresh air must be supplied The permissible ambient temperatures and the associated rated currents are listed in the technical specifications Versions Breaking capacity 65 80 kA Rated current 630 to 3200 A Rated operating voltage AC 690 V The 3W
137. delayed short circuit protection can be switched on off Thermal image can be switched on off Load monitoring Short time delayed short circuit protection can be switched to ISt Non delayed short circuit protection adjustable Vv Overload protection switchable to t _ Overload protection can be switched on off conductor protection adjustable 7 Selectable parameter sets a _ S Configuration and displays Configuration via rotary coding switches 10 steps Y Y Y Configuration via communication absolute values Configuration via user interface of ETU absolute values 2 2 Configuration of expanded protection functions z LCD alphanumerical 7 a Graphic LCD Measurement function Measurement function Measurement function Plus Communication CubicleBUS z Communication via PROFIBUS DP m Communication via Ethernet z VY Standard Not available Q Optional Detailed information about the functions of the electronic overcurrent trip units is given in the following 5 12 Siemens LV 30 2004 Circuit Breakers Non Automatic Circuit Breakers up to 6300 A SENTRON WL General data 8 g 9 3 3 2 8 S s S inf H ir Q g Q Zz Z tg NSEO 00953a NSEO 00953a NSEO 00953a
138. ding of the storage spring Indicators signals and operator controls Motor STOP switch Control switch for switching off the motorized operating mecha nism automatic loading Operating cycles counter The motorized operating mechanism can be supplied with a 5 digit operating cycles counter The display is incremented by 1 as soon as the storage spring is fully loaded Resetting the manual tripped signal When the circuit breaker has tripped this is indicated by the red protruding reset button on the ETU When the reset button is ac tivated the tripping solenoid and tripped signal are reset If this display is to be reset remotely the reset button can be equipped with a reset solenoid This option allows the circuit breaker to be reset both manually and electrically SENTRON WL General data Automatic resetting of closing lockout When the ETU is activated reclosing of the circuit breaker is prevented until the trip unit is either electrically or manually reset If the Automatic resetting of closing lockout option is used the circuit breaker is ready to close immediately after tripping Re setting the manual tripped indicator is not included in this op tion Tripped signal switch If the circuit breaker has tripped due to an overload short cir cuit ground fault or extended protection function the tripped signal switch can indicate this This signal switch is available as an option If the cir
139. drawable design Size Max rated Rated current ECO switching capacity N PS Weight Standard switching capacity S PS Weight circuit breaker In Icu 440 V per PU Iecu 440 V per PU current In max Order No approx approx Order No supplement see Page 5 36 kg kg 630 630 50 B 8WL11 06 20035 tunit 45 000 65 B 3WL11 06 30035 1unit 45 000 800 800 50 B 3WL11 08 201035 tunit 45 000 65 B 3WL11 08 30035 1 unit 45 000 1000 1000 50 B 3WL11 10 20035 tunit 45 000 65 B 3WL11 10 30035 1 unit 45 000 1250 1250 50 B 3WL11 12 201035 tunit 45 000 65 B 3WL11 12 30035 1unit 45 000 1600 1600 50 B 3WL11 16 20035 tunit 45 000 65 B 3WL11 16 30035 1 unit 45 000 Il 800 800 80 B 3WL12 08 30035 1 unit 60 000 I 1000 1000 80 B 3WL12 10 30035 1 unit 60 000 Il 1250 1250 80 B 3WL12 12 30035 1 unit 60 000 Il 1600 1600 80 B 3WL12 16 30035 1 unit 60 000 Il 2000 2000 55 B 3WL12 20 20035 tunit 60 000 80 B 3WL12 20 30035 1 unit 60 000 Il 2500 2500 55 B 3WL12 25 20035 tunit 63 000 80 B 3WL12 25 30035 1 unit 63 000 Il 3200 3200 80 B 3WL12 32 30035 1 unit 68 000 With guide frame horizontal main circuit connection 630 630 50 B 3WL11 06 20036 unit 70 000 65 B 3WL11 06 30036 1 unit 70 000 800 800 50 B 3WL11 08 201036 tunit 70 000 65 B 3WL11 08 30036 1unit 70 000 1000 1000 50 B 3WL11 10 201036
140. e section Communication capable circuit breakers and the man ual Communication links for 3VF 3WN6 3WN1 3WS1 circuit breakers to PROFIBUS DP Order No E20001 P285 A644 V1 in German only Siemens LV 30 2004 5 125 Non Automatic Circuit Breakers up to 3200 A Discontinued Series 3 pole fixed mounted design Version Rated operating voltage U up to AC 690 V without electronic trip unit system PS Size Size Rated current J rated current 7000 A 1600 A Il 2000 A 2500 A 3200 A Installation type Main circuit connections see Page 5 85 Fixed mounted Main circuit connections rear horizontal standard 6 Main circuit connections accessible from front 3 single hole at top and bottom up to 1000 A 1250 A 1600 A 2000 A 2500 A 3200 A Main circuit connections accessible from front 2 double hole at top and bottom holes in accordance with DIN 43673 1 unit 34 000 1 unit 36 000 1 unit 57 000 1 unit 59 000 1 unit 61 000 up to 1000 A 1250 A 1600 A 2000 A 2500 A 3200 A Circuit breakers also available with rated short time withstand current 11th to Tew 50 kA 1 s see Page 5 105 16th positions of the Order No see Page 5 130 5 126 Siemens LV 30 2004 This quantity or a multiple thereof can be ordered Non Automatic Circuit Breakers up to 3200 A Discontinued Series 3 pole drawable design PS Version DT Rated operating voltage U up to
141. e active in ormal lock no S1 lock in the connected position Made by IKON A 3WX3668 2JC00 1unit on req cabinet door and ormal lock no 360012 K1 interlock module Made by O M R C 3WX36 68 2JD00 1 unit on req ormal lock no 73034 Mounting set for CASTELL or FORTRESS lock 1 set C 3WX36 68 2JE00 1 set on req Interlock to be obtained from the lock manufacturer CASTELL lock FS 2 or FORTRESS lock H31LH 65 standard Locking with safety lock ade by CES 1 unit A 3WX36 67 4JA10 1unit on req device Made by BKS A 3WX36 67 4JB10 1unit on req to prevent movement of the withdrawable Made by IKON A 3WX36 67 4JC10 1 unit on req EEEa ar of Made by O M R C 3WX36 67 4JD10 1 unit on req aca ti Made by Profalux C 3WX3667 4JF10 unit on req Made by Ronis C 3WX36 67 4JG10 unit on req Locking with safety lock Made by CES 1 unit A 3WX36 67 4JA00 1unit on req device Normal lock no SSG 10 to prevent movement Made by BKS A 3WX3667 4JB00 1 unit 0 200 of the withdrawable Normal lock no 1 circuit breaker the safety Made by IKON A 3WX36 67 4JC00 1 unit on req lock prevents Normal lock no 360012 K1 opening of the Made by O M R C 3WX36 67 4JD00 1 unit on req crank hole Normal lock no 73034 Made by Profalux C 3WX36 67 4JF00 1 unit on req Made by Ronis C 3WX36 67 4JG00 1 unit on req 1 Required for protection against flashover at voltages gt AC 415 V 2 Please determine the number of connecting bars required yourself 5 114
142. e g for parameterization i e setting the protection parameters and additional functions activation of operating current indi cation version D E F H J K N P if no load current is flowing in the main circuits e wP fault The alarm LED is activated for all versions if the microproces sor is faulty For the additional functions 1 and 2 a signal can also be issued via the optical coupler The circuit breaker is not tripped in this case However the protection function is se cured by means of a redundant bypass e Temperature alarm If the temperature in the electronic trip unit exceeds the limit value of 85 C this is indicated by means of an LED For the additional functions 1 and 2 a signal can also be issued via the optical coupler Additional functions 2 e External DC 24 V power supply see additional functions 1 e uP fault see additional functions 1 e Temperature alarm see additional functions 1 an e Leading signal a trip The leading signal via optical coupler for the overload trip is used to deactivate the downstream thyristor control devices The overload tripping operation is then performed after 200 ms Circuit Breakers up to 3200 A Discontinued Series e Load monitoring Load monitoring is adjustable via two selectable operating val ues for load receiving and load shedding IAW1 IAW2 anda common delay time td AW e g alarm Signal via optical coupler on ground fault e Zone Select
143. eady to close indicator e Memory status indicator e Auxiliary switches 2 NO 2 NC e Rear horizontal main circuit connections for fixed mounted and withdrawable versions up to 5000 A and rear vertical main cir cuit connections for 6300 A applications e For 4 pole circuit breakers the fourth pole N is installed on the left and is 100 loadable e Contact erosion indicator for the main contacts e Auxiliary circuit plug system with SIGUT screw type terminals Delivery inclusive of all auxiliary circuit connectors to internal specifications including coding device for the prevention of in correct installation of fixed mounted circuit breakers e Mechanical tripped indicator for electronic overcurrent trip unit system Mechanical closing lockout after tripping operation Control panel cannot be taken off with the switch in the ON position User manual on CD ROM for printed version see options Additional features of the withdrawable design Main contacts Laminated receptacles in the guide frame penetration blades on the withdrawable circuit breaker e Position indicator in the control panel of the withdrawable circuit breaker e Captive manual crank lever for moving the withdrawable circuit breaker e Guide frame with guide rails for easy moving of the withdraw able circuit breaker e The withdrawable circuit breaker can be locked to prevent it being pushed out of position SENTRON WL General data e The withd
144. ected position main circuit and auxiliary circuit ready Test position main circuit disconnected auxiliary circuit ready Disconnected position main circuit and auxiliary circuit disconnected In the disconnected position the withdrawable circuit breaker complies with the isolation condition with a visible isolating dis tance in the main circuit and auxiliary circuit The circuit breaker must always be switched off before it is moved The OFF button must be held down when the slide in the crank hole is opened Circuit Breakers up to 3200 A Discontinued Series Closing of the crank hole is only possible in the circuit breaker positions connected test or disconnected position The circuit breaker position is shown on a display on the circuit breaker The circuit breaker is moved with the help of a hand crank The connected position as well as the disconnected position is achieved by moving the circuit breaker to the end stop e Position indicator switches The position indicator switches are operated by the withdraw able circuit breaker via an additional mechanical device Apart from indicating the position they also indicate that the circuit breaker is present in the guide frame This version is suitable for interlock circuits including other protective devices e Shutters Inadvertent touching of live main contacts or busbars is pre vented by covering with a shutter The shutter is constructed in two parts and allow
145. ed Circuit Breakers Non Automatic Circuit Breakers up to 6300 A SENTRON WL Accessories spare parts Circuit diagram in as supplied state Version Size DT PS Weight per PU approx kg Withdrawable short circuit ground and bridging units LE RK a Top and 3 pole aa 5 bottom up to 1600 A C 3WL9 111 0BD01 0AA0 tunit on req o parts of system edas are up to 3200 A C 3WL9 111 0BD03 0AA0 unit on req Cees short circuited up to 6300 A Il C 3WL9 111 0BD05 0AA0 1unit on req and grounded NSE0_01113 TYY 4 pole as supplied tete AKA A E up to 1600 A C 3WL9 111 0BD02 0AA0 unit on req asl 3 up to 3200 A l C 3WL9 111 0BD04 0AA0 1unit on req up to 6300 A I C 3WL9 111 0BD06 0AA0 unit on req T Y TITE 7 Conversion for the following applications is possible al il A A A EI t2 L3 oa NSEO_01113 NSEO_01112 YYY g Zz g AAA A 3 JOO F N ii ta iej 5 E r Y 3 Y TEA E CTE Top and bottom part of system are short circuited and grounded Top and bottom part of system are short circuited and grounded as supplied state incoming supply from below AM ee NSEO_01115 Y i Y l Y NSEO_01114 Y i y i Y i i rF 5 N L1 L2 tal 2 Yor vo rele eel eg Withdrawable bridging unit incoming and outgoing side are permanently connected to each other Bottom part of system is short circuited and
146. egree of protection with cover without cover Dimensions 3 4 pole mB ETa NSS0_00535 ACV DC V kA Operat ing cycles W mm Hmm Dmm 630 800 1000 1250 1600 3 pole 4 pole up to 690 50 65 20000 30 30 30 30 4 NSE0O_00061 NSEO_00062 IPSS IP20 Fixed mounted Withdrawable 320 410 320 410 434 465 5 291 471 Electronic overcurrent trip units of SENTRON WL circuit breakers Type NSE0_01107 800 1000 1250 1600 2000 2500 3200 3 pole 4 pole up to 690 1000 55 80 100 15000 30 30 30 30 L NSE0_00061 NSE0_00062 P55 IP20 Fixed mounted Withdrawable 460 590 460 590 434 465 5 291 471 NSEO_01109 4000 5000 6300 3 pole 4 pole up to 690 1000 100 10000 30 4 30 NSEO_00061 IP55 IP20 Fixed mounted 704 914 434 291 30 NSE0_00062 30 Withdrawable 704 914 466 5 471 Overload protection Short time delayed short circuit protection nstantaneous short circuit protection Neutral conductor protection Ground fault protection Zone Selective Interlocking LCD 4 line LCD graphic Communication via PROFIBUS DP easurement functions Selectable parameter sets Parameters freely programmable y Standard Not available Q Optional 5 2 Siemens LV 30 2004 y v v v v v v v v v v v v v m Q Q Q Q S D oO Es S 1
147. eight quantity per per PU circuit breaker approx kg Coding device 1 set A 3WX36 62 1JC00 1 set 0 200 to prevent mix up of equal sized withdrawable circuit breakers in a switchboard oF The required number of auxiliary supply e operating mechanism type ial connectors depends on e electronic trip unit with without additional functions with without current transformer L e type and number of auxiliary releases e number of auxiliary switches a First auxiliary supply connector for standard signals always required 1 b Operating mechanism b1 Manual operating mechanism with stored energy feature with mechanical closing 0 b2 Manual operating mechanism with mechanical and electrical closing 1 b3 Manual motor operated mechanism with stored energy feature with mechanical and electrical closing 1 c Electronic trip units c1 with basic functions 0 c2 with additional functions 1 or 2 2 Connections for external current transformers for overload protection in the neutral conductor and ground fault protection c3 Current transformer installed in the neutral conductor required with 3 pole circuit breakers if 1 c2 is not selected c4 Current transformer installed in the neutral point of the transformer 1 required if c2 is not selected d Auxiliary releases di without with 1st auxiliary release shunt release f F1 undervoltage release r F3 0 d2 1st auxiliary release delayable undervoltage release rc F8 required if b2 or b3 is
148. elease Indicator fault in overcurrent release Rated current module Indicators Earth fault alarm Earth fault tripped Option earth fault module Fields for noting setting values Fields for noting setting values Test pushbutton Clear pushbutton Query pushbutton Test socket NSEO_00960 SENTRON WL General data Application The trip unit for special safety requirements which can be set via exclusive external parame ter access for generator and motor protection as well as industrial applications CubicleBUS integrated Features The same as ETU45B but also including e Two protection parameter sets which can be stored separately in the trip unit switchover is performed via external signal e With overload protection which can be deactivated for use in modern drive technology e Adjustable delay of delayed short circuit protection up to 4000 ms e Neutral conductor protection adjustable up to Jy 2 x Jy e Setting of protection functions by means of Breaker Data Adapter BDA or via communication in terface For technical details see table Function overview of the electronic overcurrent trip unit sys tem Application The multi talent with graphical display for system analysis CubicleBUS integrated Features The same as ETU55B but also including e Graphical display of all parameters and events curve trends e Storage of events and causes for tripping for de
149. elease di With without 1st auxiliary release shunt release F1 0 X6 d2 2nd auxiliary release shunt release F2 undervoltage release F3 undervoltage release F4 that can be delayed 1 X5 e Auxiliary switch block el 1st auxiliary switch block 2 NO 2 NC 0 X6 e2 1st and 2nd auxiliary switch block 4 NO 4 NC or 6 NO 2 NC or 5 NO 3 NC required if b3 or d2 is not selected 1 X5 f Communication module ft Without communication module COM15 0 f2 With communication module COM15 1 X7 occupies the entire terminal block X7 making the following options no longer possible e Tripped signaling switch S24 e Stored energy status indication S21 e Electrical ON button S10 e Signaling switch on first and second auxiliary release S22 S23 g Optional signals accessories gi Tripped signaling switch S24 only possible if f2 is not selected 1 X7 g2 Stored energy status indication S21 only possible if f2 is not selected required if g1 is not selected 1 X7 g3 Electrical ON button S10 only possible if f2 is not selected required if g1 or g2 is not selected 1 X7 g4 Signaling switch on first auxiliary release S22 only possible if f2 is not selected required if g1 g2 or g3 is not selected 1 X7 g5 Signaling switch on second auxiliary release S23 only possible if f2 is not selected required if g1 g2 g3 or g4 is not 1 X7 selected g6 Ready to close signaling switch S20 0 X6 97 Motor shutdown switch S12 only possible if motorized operating mechanism is
150. emens LV 30 2004 5 91 Circuit Breakers up to 3200 A Discontinued Series eE ELE Communication module Z F01 e The electronic trip units are internally equipped with an addi tional communication module for communication via PROFIBUS DP in this case please use the prefix Z with the Order Number i e Z F01 The data are transferred over a 3 m plug in connection included in scope of supply to an external DP 3WN6 interface This converts the data for PROFIBUS DP The following useful data are available depending on the ver sion and accessories of the circuit breaker Analog measured values Phase currents J 4 JLo 1 3 Imax and Imin N conductor current Iy Ground fault current Ig Event signals Type of previous tripping operation a z n g N uP fault temperature alarm phase symmetry load shedding load receiving overload Operating states Switch on off ready indication status of the voltage undercurrent release storage spring loaded position test and connected position of the withdrawable circuit breaker test of the electronic trip unit Remote configuration Read out configuration data Settings for the protection functions Rated current for the circuit breaker number of poles identification code for circuit breaker Diagnostics data Average current for previous fifteen minutes Remote control To open and close the circuit breaker provided that it is equipped with electrical que
151. ened the manual crank used to move the circuit breaker cannot be positioned e Blocking mechanism against insertion of the withdrawable circuit breaker The guide rails can be interlocked with one slide each and locked with two padlocks e Blocking mechanism against moving the withdrawable circuit breaker A padlock prevents access to the crank hole and application of the crank max shackle diameter 8 mm possible with all versions or the same can be achieved with an additionally available safety lock see Functions Opening closing and locking devices Fixed mounted circuit breakers Main circuit termi Main circuit termi nals rear nals accessible horizontal from front standard single hole at top and bottom Main circuit connections Guide frame Siemens LV 30 2004 Circuit Breakers up to 3200 A Discontinued Series eE ELE Electronic trip units Te 10s 6x4 Electronic trip unit version B azn Electronic trip unit version E F aznNg Electronic trip unit version J K aznNg Electronic trip unit version P aznNg Electronic trip unit version N aznN without ground fault release 5 86 Siemens LV 30 2004 E Functions Electronic trip units General description The new generation of solid state microprocessor based elec tronic trip units Overload protection a Inverse time delayed overload release for overload protection of load eeders and cables
152. er of Siia man the locks FORTRESS lock H31LH 65 standard Mounting set for CASTELL lock S415 Po Interlock to be obtained from the manufacturer of the locks CASTELL lock FS 2 Mounting set for KIRK KEY lock SHIS Poo 0 With sealing cap Cannot be combined with safety lock SZAN oo over OFF button to prevent unautho rized opening O With sealing cap over electrical ON button S22 oo to prevent unauthorized closing 1 Locks must be ordered from the manufacturer 2 This makes mechanical or electrical ON commands ineffective 3 See also section on Communication capable circuit breakers Siemens LV 30 2004 5 105 Circuit Breakers up to 3200 A Discontinued Series When ordering circuit breakers in the following versions Order Order No with Z Add Z to the complete Order No and code aWNG oe ee eee indicate the appropriate order code s and additional order code s Ft A Code for Further versions Z For fixed mounted circuit breakers CLAI mam Blocking device to prevent opening of the cabinet door with the circuit breaker closed ISi215 to prevent closing of the circuit breaker with the S214 cabinet door open Mutual mechani Interlock module with a Bowden wire 2 m when S518 cal interlock for interlocking three circuit breakers 3WN6 circuit an additional Bowden wire is required bre
153. er with C characteristic With stored energy feature Rated control supply voltage Us AC 50 60 Hz v 110 230 consisting of shunt release DC v 110 220 and capacitor storage device Operating range ORS oa T oe Power input AC DC VAW 1 1 Storage time at U recharging time at Us max 5 min min 5 s Opening time of circuit breaker as with for continuous com mand short circuit protection Siemens LV 30 2004 5 23 Circuit Breakers Non Automatic Circuit Breakers up to 6300 A SENTRON WL eE ELE Size 1 M Auxiliary releases Undervoltage release Operating values pickup 2 0 85 x U circuit breaker can UVR F3 and be closed UVR tg F4 dropout OSS Ore UE circuit breaker is tripped Operating range OSI oo Hel Extended operating range for battery operation for DC 24 V DC 30 V DC 48 V DC 110 V OSES cos WA DC 220 V Rated control supply voltage U AC 50 60 Hz v 110 127 208 240 380 415 DC V 24 30 48 1 10 220 250 Power input pickup continuous duty AC VA 200 5 DC Ww 200 5 Opening time of circuit breaker at U 0 ms 200 Design UVR F3 Instantaneous With delay ins a Design UVR ty F8 With delay tq 0 2 3 2 s s Oo Reset via additional NC contact direct switching off ms lt 100 Short circuit protection 1 A TDz time lag 1 A Smallest permissible DIAZED fuse operational class gL miniature circuit breaker w
154. es shown for the arcing time Refer to the following table for tolerances The characteristics shown apply to ambient temperatures at the circuit breaker between 5 and 55 C The trip unit can be op erated at ambient temperatures of 20 to 70 C An extended tolerance band can apply at these temperatures NSE00598a t 10000 v 1000 100 10 01 100 1000 10000 100000 I A gt SENTRON WL circuit breaker with J 1000 A and electronic trip unit ETU15B t 10000 NSE00599b 1000 100 10 01 100 1000 10000 100000 I A SENTRON WL circuit breaker with J 1000 A and electronic trip unit ETU25B or ETU27B tripping characteristic ground fault protec tion G for ETU27B see below SENTRON WL Project planning aids 10000 NSE00600a z i 1000 100 01 100 1000 10000 100000 I A gt SENTRON WL circuit breaker with J 1000 A and electronic trip unit ETU27B ground fault protection G a Inverse time delayed overload range L t constant eS Overlapping of the inverse time delayed overload range L of tand Mt Inverse time delayed overload range L I t constant Short time delayed short circuit range S Instantaneous short circuit range I Ground fault protection range G Tolerances for the operating currents L tripping operations between 1 05 and 1 2 x Jp S 0 20 I 0 20 G 0 20 Tolerances for the tripping times L
155. et delay time tR 10 seconds at 6 x Ip e Short time delayed short circuit protection adjustable in the range from 1 25 to 12 x J and e Non delayed short circuit pro tection preset to 20 x I max 50 kA e Can be adapted to the required plant currents through retrofitta ble rated current module to en sure overload protection in the range from 100 A to 6300 A e Overload display e Indicates the reason for tripping by means of an LED e Test option for the trip unit e Protection functions are set by means of the rotary coding switch For technical details see table Function overview of the elec tronic overcurrent trip unit system under Technical specifications Siemens LV 30 2004 5 15 Circuit Breakers Non Automatic Circuit Breakers up to 6300 A SENTRON WL General data ETU27B electronic overcurrent trip unit BREAKER TRIPPED mm esr Option safety lock prevents pressing of reset button after overcurrent release 1 Mechanical RESET for reclosing lockout NSEO_00956a Indicator overcurrent release activated N conductor protection on off Indicator overload alarm Indicator fault in Rated current module overcurrent release Rotary switch for setting value overload release Indicator cause of release Rotary switch for delay Rotary switch for setting short circuit release value instantaneous short circuit release Short circuit protection aa ca fixed set
156. fali li let PA 68 e j i 7 270 25 i t t H 320 2 410 f 15 l 90 90 90 NSE00630 m 350 gt e14 r 260 gt 55 55 t55 55 g a M 12 in g N 2 i t o o 2 N a i N g I 5 4 wo N roy i N 121 x P o 15 4 pole design P 3 Rated circuit breaker current 3 Slots 4 mm wide 5 mm deep for supporting phase barriers A a b c in the system Auxiliary connector with screw type terminals SIGUT up to 1000 10 10 10 Auxiliary connector with screwless connection system tension spring 1250 1600 15 15 15 4 5 At y ect 8 en Meno tir a cabinet dogr Safety clearances to grounded parts as well as to live parts see 8 SENTRON WL in test position page 5 60 9 SENTRON WL in disconnected position 0 Fixing holes 10 mm 1 Terminal face 5 62 Siemens LV 30 2004 Circuit Breakers Non Automatic Circuit Breakers up to 6300 A SENTRON WL Project planning aids Size Il up to 3200 A fixed mounted design 3 and 4 pole Standard design Horizontal connection 434 NSE00633 wwseoosse ii oi 25 F 123 5 275 435 5 1 m i 12 la 3 A Fa 5 m g 4 agli GEE j soj A 45 le es I lt 210 106 ke 130 130 430 90 e Pee y b d peo oso BESLAN 7 NSE00639b
157. g with setting with setting with setting Size Il Size II J then I then I then J then up to 65 kA up to 65 kA Tou les low Tou les low Fou los low Icu lcs lcw lowest value lowest value lowest value lowest value decisive decisive decisive decisive 0 2 0 6x Ip 0 2 0 6x 1n 20 Ip 20 In up to 1200 A up to 1200 A 100 500 ms 100 500 ms 100 500 ms 100 500 ms 100 500 ms 100 500 ms 100 500 ms e e e e e J e e J e o J e e e e e o J e o e J e J e e e e o J e e ou ou ou ou J e e e e e J e o e J A A A A e e A A A A A A A A A A A A Aull Aull All Aull A A A A A A e e A A A A A A A x x x x A Aull Aull All Aull x A Aull Xl All Aull A A Aull Aull All Aull A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A 2 g release occurs with Trip setting on the electronic trip unit Function available as standard 3 Where there is heavy starting of motors the time setting 7 10 s may not A Function optional additional cost be sufficient use version D E F H J K or P E Deselect set function with hand held device 4 For ty gt 500 ms Igy Zew Tes lowest value decisive and Jy automatically Function active when tg is set to 20 ms limited to 15 kA X Available with electronic trip unit B only from date of manufacture 02 96 Si
158. glish Order No 3ZX18 12 OWL00 0ANO Delivery time C complete set French ltalian Order No 3ZX18 12 0WL00 0AJ0 on request Spanish Portuguese Order No 3ZX18 12 OWL00 0ALO on request Manual German Order No E20001 A201 P307 Communication English Order No E20001 A201 P307 X 7600 Free download of the documentation from www siemens de energieverteilung Further information Up to date information on the Internet at www siemens de sentron 5 56 Siemens LV 30 2004 Circuit Breakers Non Automatic Circuit Breakers up to 6300 A E Characteristics Every electronic trip unit type and every setting has its own char acteristic Only a selection is shown in the following The charac teristics show the largest and smallest setting range of SENTRON WL circuit breakers with 1000 A rated current at 440 V rated voltage with various trip units In order to obtain a complete tripping characteristic the relevant parts of the char acteristics have to be combined The characteristics show the behavior of the electronic trip unit when it is activated by a cur rent that is already flowing before the tripping operation If the overcurrent tripping occurs immediately after switch on and the electronic trip unit is therefore not yet enabled the opening time is extended depending on the level of the overcurrent by up to 15 ms In order to determine the total break times of the circuit breakers approximately 15 ms must be added to the opening tim
159. gn 1 h 20 20 20 Service position 30 4 30 3024 30 and 2 NSE0_00061 NSE0_00062 l NSE00927 Degree of protection IP20 without cabinet door IP30 with door mounting frame IP55 with cover Auxiliary conductors Cu Standard connection strain relief clamp Max no of without end sleeve 2 x 0 5 mm AWG 20 2 x 1 5 mm AWG 16 1 x 2 5 mm AWG 14 auxiliary conductors x cross with end sleeve to DIN 46228 Part 2 1 x 0 5 mm AWG 20 1 x 1 5 mm2 AWG 16 section solid stranded with twin end sleeve 2 x 0 5 mm AWG 20 2 x 1 5 mm AWG 16 optional connection tension spring without end sleeve 2 x 0 5 mm AWG 20 2 x 2 5 mm AWG 14 with end sleeve to DIN 46228 Part 2 2 x 0 5 mm AWG 20 2 x 1 5 mm AWG 16 Weights 3 pole Fixed mounted circuit breaker kg 56 56 64 Withdrawable circuit breaker kg 60 60 68 Guide frames kg 31 31 45 4 pole Fixed mounted circuit breaker kg 67 67 77 Withdrawable circuit breaker kg 72 72 82 Guide frames kg 37 37 54 1 Make time via closing solenoid for synchronization purposes 3 Further technical specifications on request short time excited 50 ms 2 Maintenance means replace main contact elements and arc chutes see Operator s Guide Short circuit breaking capacity Size I Type 3WL12 Switching capacity class DC up to DC 300 V Toc kA 30 up to DC 600 V Tc kA 25 up to DC 1000 V Tag kA 20 Rated short time withstand current Zew 0 5s kA 1s kA 30
160. gn 1 h 60 60 60 60 60 1000 V design 1 h 20 20 20 20 20 Minimum interval between tripping operation by over cur ms 80 80 80 80 80 rent release and next making operation of the circuit breaker only with autom mechanical resetting of the lock out device Service position 3027305 30 30 and A or NSE0_00061 NSE0_00062 l NSE00927 Degree of protection IP20 without cabinet door IP30 with door mounting frame IP55 with cover Main conductor Copper bars Qty 2x 3x 4x 6x 6x minimum bare mm 100 x 10 100 x 10 100 x 10 100 x 10 120 x 10 cross sections Copper bars Qty 2x 3x 4x 6x 6x painted black mm 100 x 10 100 x 10 100 x 10 100 x 10 120 x 10 Auxiliary conductors Cu Standard connection strain relief Max no of clamp auxiliary conductors x without end sleeve 2 x 0 5 mm AWG 20 to 2 x 1 5 mm AWG 16 1 x 2 5 mm AWG 14 cross section with end sleeve to 1 x 0 5 mm AWG 20 to 1 x 1 5 mm AWG 16 solid stranded DIN 46228 T 2 with twin end sleeve 2 x 0 5 mm AWG 20 to 2 x 1 5 mm AWG 16 optional connection tension spring without end sleeve 2 x 0 5 mm AWG 20 to 2 x 2 5 mm AWG 14 with end sleeve to 2 x 0 5 mm AWG 20 to 2 x 1 5 mm AWG 16 DIN 46228 T 2 Weights 3 pole Fixed mounted circuit kg 59 64 82 82 90 breaker Withdrawable circuit breaker kg 63 68 88 88 96 4 pole Guide frame kg 39 45 60 60 70 Fixed mounted circuit kg 71 VA 29 299 108 breaker Withdrawable circuit breaker kg 76 82 106 106 108 Guide frame kg 47 54 8
161. grounded incoming supply from above This quantity or a multiple thereof can be ordered Siemens LV 30 2004 5 55 Circuit Breakers Non Automatic Circuit Breakers up to 6300 A SENTRON WL Project planning aids E Overview Structure of the Order No 3WL1 2 2 0 4AINIIGI 3 0 OFIAR An important prerequisite for computer Example based order processing is that order Example numbers must be structured according 5th position Size Size I 2 to standardized criteria EON They are used as an unambiguous 6th and 7th Max rated circuit 1u and Zn max 2000 A m 2 0 means of communication for various positions breaker current Jn max purposes e Offer processing 8th position Switching capacity High switching capacity ME 4 Selection and configuration class H 100 kA e Order processing Ordering 9th position Electronic trip units ETU76 with pixel graphics Ses N Order confirmation display Handling warehouse products Order processing at the 10th position Electronic trip unit with ground fault protectio supply bases paag suppleren a7 wee ane i Gl Delivery and shipment e Reporting and PNA planning 11th position Number of poles 3 pole 3 s Sorice anid waranty 12th position Installation type Fixed mounted design main terminals cr 1 The standardized structure ensures that vertical only one Order No has to be adminis tered for one device 13th position Operati
162. he next circuit breaker immediately down stream for presence of the short circuit current in the next lower staggered level Q21 Q31 AP Q32 AE e 1933 ro 5 A Q41 5 5K1 Siemens LV 30 2004 5 89 Circuit Breakers up to 3200 A Discontinued Series General data Functional overview of the electronic trip unit system Basic functions Function Overload protection a Inverse time delayed overload release a for the phases Adjustment of the current setting 7 from 40 to 100 J Graduation 5 Graduation freely programmable To Time lag class 7 opening time at 6 x J setting Te Thermal image Phase failure sensitivity reversible NSE0_01136 for the neutral conductor Adjustment of the current setting 7 Time lag class 7 of the neutral conductor as for the phases Short circuit protection I gt Short time delayed Setting the operating current Ig short circuit release z Setting the delay time ty With I ty dependent delay delay time ty NSEO_01135 fi NSEO 01137 Instantaneous short circuit release n Setting the operating current J Ground fault protection HPs s NSEN 04428 Ground fault release g Setting the operating current Ig Setting the delay time tg With t dependent delay delay time fy LCD display Operating current ind
163. he version the short circuiting links are arranged at the top or bottom The ground and short circuit connections are established when the device is inserted It must be ensured that the side to be short circuited and grounded is not live For this reason it is recommended that the withdrawable unit is only wound in when the door is closed Withdrawable bridging unit The withdrawable bridging unit consists of a breaker enclosure in which all disconnection components and the operating mech anism have been replaced with simple connections between the upper and lower contacts Siemens LV 30 2004 5 7 SENTRON WL eE ELE Circuit breaker 28 Arc chute Carrying handle Labeling plates 27 Motor cutout switch option or Electrical ON option Name plate for circuit breaker 26 Spring charge indicator Mechanical ON button Cm EL Rated current indication Positioning pictogram 24 Operating cycles counter option Hand operated lever 23 Crank handle 22 Withdrawable unit drive shaft Equipment plate 21 Grounding connection Position indicator Table for ground fault protection 20 Safety lock for crank handle option Mechanical unlocking of 19 crank handle option Electronic overcurrent trip unit 18 Rating plug Mechanical OFF button or 17 EMERGENCY STOP mushroom push i button option Ready to
164. ible DIAZED fuse operational class gL 6A Dz quick Tripped switch Signal duration after tripping until manual or electrical remote controlled reset option Position indicator switch on guide frame Type of contact Signal Circuit breaker in connected position 3W 1W Circuit breaker in test position 2W or 1W Circuit breaker in disconnected 1W 1W position Rated insulation voltage U AC 50 60 Hz V 440 DC V 250 Rated operating voltage U V 250 Switching capacity Rated operating Te AC 12 110 127 V 13 A 220 230 V 13 A current Ie 320 400 V 0 6 A T AC 15 110 127 V5 A 220 230 V 4 A 320 440 V3A I DC 12 24 V 13 A 30 V 10 A 48 V 2 5 A 110 V 0 8 A 220 250 V 0 6 A I DC 13 24 V 3 0 A 220 250 V 0 1 A Short circuit protection Largest permissible DIAZED fuse operational class gL Largest permissible miniature circuit breaker with C characteristic 8 A TDz slow 8 A TDz slow Siemens LV 30 2004 5 25 U j SENTRON WL General data Functional overview of the electronic trip unit system Protection functions ETU15B ETU25B ETU27B Configuration via D amp S Overload protection Function can be switched on off Setting range Ip I x 6 0 7 0 8 on O o SSTA E a Kies Switchable overload protection Pt or I tdependent function Setting range for time lag class tp at t 10 s fixed 10 s fixed 10 s fixed Setting range for time lag
165. ic reset of the lockout device Ko gt CLO Tripped signaling switch 1 changeover Kiol i O Remote reset solenoid for display and reset button including automatic reset of the lockout device AC 50 60HzV__ DC V 24 K 1 0 48 KOO 120 125 KOL C11 220 240 250 KOB Motorized operating mechanism and closing solenoid Motorized operating mechanism Only possible if the 13th digit of the Order No 1 Motor AC 50 60 Hz V DC V 24 30 MoN z 48 60 Mos 110 127 110 125 moB P gt 0 208 240 220 250 Mios Closing solenoid suitable for continuous duty 100 ON time Only possible if the 13th digit of the Order No 1 Activation solenoid AC 50 60 Hz V DC V 24 M2m 30 M212 48 M213 SC 60 M214 110 110 M215 230 220 M216 Closing solenoid unsuitable for continuous duty 5 ON time Only possible i Activation solenoid the 13th digit of the Order No 1 AC 50 60Hz V DCV 24 MIS z 48 MBB 110 127 110 125 maB P CO 208 240 220 250 M36 Communication and measurement function Breaker status sensor BSS connection E O PROFIBUS communication interface E 02 including COM15 and Breaker status sensor BSS Measurement function without PROFIBUS communication Eloa C11 interface Measurement function Plus without PROFIBUS communication F 0 5 interface EMC filter EM
166. ication LED display Status indication Flashing LED when electronic trip unit activated Tripped indication a release fe Z n release LP 2 release Lie n release I gt N release g release alarm A Alarm indication uP fault 6 temperature gt 85 C p9 phase unbalance freely assignable indication Test Internal self test and display via LED Connection of the test device to test connector X3 Basic configuration Signal by signaling switch 1 NO Additional function Ready to close Circuit breaker can be safely closed Tripped switch Latching active after a z n g release with without mechanical closing lockout Signal via optocoupler outputs Additional functions 1 External DC 24 V supply e g for parameterization current input 250 mA uP faul 6 temperature gt 85 C linked with phase unbalance Additional functions 2 External DC 24 V supply e g for parameterization current input 250 mA uP faul 9 temperature gt 85 C linked with phase unbalance Leading signal a release 200 ms to release load shedding Load monitoring operating value 50 to 150 1 to 15s g alarm Zone Selective Interlocking between 3WN and 3WS Communication via PROFIBUS DP Data transmission Data transmission and measured value acquisition Communication module in conjunction with additional functions 2 and interface DP 3WN6 Mea
167. ional a AB Electronic trip units Design without ground fault protection ETU15B protection functions LI BB ETU25B protection functions LSI CB ETU45B protection functions LSIN4 EB ETU45B protection functions LSIN with 4 line display FB ETUSS5B protection functions LSIN JB ETU76B protection functions LSIN with pixel graphics display NB Design with ground fault protection ETU27B protection functions LSING DG ETU45B protection functions LSING EG ETU45B protection functions LSING with 4 line display FG ETUS5B protection functions LSING JG ETU76B protection functions LSING with pixel graphics display NG Standard Order No supplements for further Order No supplements see Page 5 36 Manual operating mechanism with mechanical closing Without 15t and 2 auxiliary releases auxiliary switch 2 NC 2 NO 1AA2 Footnotes for pages 5 32 and 5 33 4 Current transformers for vectorial summation current formation or for pro tection of the neutral conductor and current transformers for detection of the ground fault current in the grounded star point of the transformer must be ordered separately see Page 5 46 or they can be ordered by adding the supplement Z and order code F23 see Page 5 37 5 Size Ill circuit breakers are not available with electronic trip unit design ETU15B 1 Rated current determined by rated current module On the standard design the supplied
168. ircuit switching capacity Ig for non automatic circuit breakers see Page 5 77 5 78 Siemens LV 30 2004 This quantity or a multiple thereof can be ordered Non Automatic Circuit Breakers for DC up to 4000 A SENTRON WL 3 and 4 pole withdrawable design Max rated circuit breaker current In max A Without guide frame for guide frames see Page 5 80 1 unit 60 000 1unit 60 000 B q1unit 68 000 B Il 2000 With guide frame horizontal main circuit connection ll 1000 ei 1 unit 91 000 109 000 ll 2000 1 unit 91 000 1 unit 109 000 ll 4000 1 unit 113 000 136 000 q1 unit 91 000 1 unit 91 000 1 unit 113 000 109 000 1 unit 109 000 136 000 Il 2000 Il 1000 1 unit 91 000 109 000 ll 2000 1 unit 91 000 1 unit 109 000 ll 4000 1 unit 113 000 1 unit 136 000 Order No supplements Order No supplements without electronic trip unit AA AA Standard Order No supplements for further Order No supplements see Page 5 36 Non automatic circuit breakers Manual operating mechanism with 1AA2 1AA2 mechanical closing Rated voltage DC 1000 V order with Z and order code A05 All other accessory parts must be ordered with Z and order codes see Circuit breakers non automatic circuit breakers up to 6300 A SENTRON WL Options Page 5 36 onwards 1 Provisons to dissipate heat must be made on the line side 2 For permissible
169. ith C characteristic Contact position driven auxiliary switches S1 S2 S3 S4 S7 S8 Rated insulation voltage U AC DC V 500 Rated operating voltage Us AC DC V 500 Switching capacity AC Rated operating voltage U V 24 230 380 400 500 50 60 Hz Rated operating current T AC 12 A 10 10 10 T AC 15 A 4 3 2 DC Rated operating voltage U V 24 48 110 220 Rated operating current DC 12 A 10 8 35 i I DC 13 A 8 4 1 2 0 4 Short circuit protection Largest permissible DIAZED fuse operational class gL 10 A TDz 10 A Dz Largest permissible miniature circuit breaker with C characteristic 10A 1 24 V and 30 V only with undervoltage release UVR F3 5 24 Siemens LV 30 2004 Circuit Breakers Non Automatic Circuit Breakers up to 6300 A SENTRON WL General data Size 1 M Ready to close signaling switch S20 to DIN VDE 0630 Switching capacity AC Rated operating voltage Ue V 110 220 Rated operating current Ie A 0 14 0 1 DC Rated operating voltage Ue V 24 220 Rated operating current J A 0 2 osi Short circuit protection Largest permissible DIAZED fuse operational class gL 2A Dz quick Tripped switch Signal duration after tripping on req Tripped signaling switch S24 to DIN VDE 0630 Switching capacity AC Rated operating voltage U V 230 Rated operating current AC 12 A6 DC Rated operating voltage Us V 24 110 220 Rated operating current J DC 12 AS 0 4 0 2 Short circuit protection Largest permiss
170. ive Interlocking see short circuit protection with Zone Selective Interlocking ZSI Hand held device e Description The hand held device is connected to the electronic trip unit by means of a connecting lead and a snap on power supply adapter A DC 24 V power supply can be connected to the adapter to activate the trip unit This hand held device can also be used for the communication capable motor protection and control device 3UF5 SIMOCODE DP for configuration and operation e Functions Reading and writing the protection parameters for electronic trip unit versions H J K N and P Connecting and setting operating values for the additional functions of the electronic trip unit versions D E F H J K N and P The settings read out from the trip unit can be temporarily stored in the hand held device and written to a different elec tronic trip unit Hand held device General data Short circuit protection with Zone Selective Interlocking The Zone Selective Interlocking function permits full discrimina tion for the very short delay time of tzsi 50 ms regardless of the number of staggered levels and location of the short circuit in the distribution system Reduction of the break time reduces the stress and damage that can occur in a distribution system considerably If the Zone Selective Interlocking function is set and a short cir cuit occurs every circuit breaker through which the short circuit flows interrogates t
171. ize I ll Il Type 3WL11 3WL12 3WL13 Switching capacity class N S N S H H up to AC 415 V Jej kA 50 65 55 80 100 100 Tog kA 50 65 55 80 100 100 ITem kA 105 143 121 176 220 220 up to AC 500 V Tou kA 50 65 55 80 100 100 Teg kA 50 65 55 80 100 100 Tom kA 105 143 121 176 220 220 up to AC 690 V Tou kA 42 50 50 75 85 85 Tos kA 42 50 50 75 85 85 Tom kA 88 105 105 165 187 187 up to AC 1000 V Teg kA 45 50 Tees kA 45 50 Tern kA 95 105 Size l Il Ml Type 3WL11 3WL12 3WL13 Switching capacity class N S N S H H 05s kA 42 65 55 80 100 100 1s kA 42 50 55 65 80 100 2s kA 2915 35 39 46 651 70 80 3s kA 24 29 32 Si 50 65 65 Size I Il Il Type 3WL11 3WL12 3WL13 Switching capacity class N S N S H H up to AC 500 V kA 42 65 55 80 100 100 up to AC 690 V kA 42 50 50 75 85 85 1 Size II with In max lt 2500 A 2 Size II with In max 3200 A 5 20 Siemens LV 30 2004 SENTRON WL General data Size l ll Type up to 3WL1112 3WL1116 3WL1208 3WL1210 3WL1212 3WL1216 3WL12 20 3WL11 10 Rated current J at 40 C at 50 60 Hz Main conductor A up to 1000 1250 1600 800 1000 1250 1600 2000 Neutral conductor only with 4 pole versions A up to 1000 1250 1600 800 1000 1250 1600 2000 Rated operating voltage U at 50 60 Hz ACV upto690 upto690 upto690 upto up to up to up to up to 1000 V design see options 690 1000 690 1000 690 1
172. k Made by CES 1 unit A 3WX36 63 2JA00 1 uni 0 120 3SB1 instead Normal lock no SSG 1 of the mechani Made by BKS A 3WX36 63 2JB00 1 uni 0 120 cal ON button Normal ce no S1 Made by IKO A 3WX36 63 2JC00 1 uni 0 120 Normal lock no 360012 K1 Mounting set for CASTELL or 1 set A 3WX36 63 6JE00 1 se 0 100 FORTRESS lock Interlock to be obtained from the lock manu facturer CASTELL lock FS 2 or FORTRESS lock H31LH 65 standard Mounting set for KIRK KEY lock 1 unit A 3WX36 63 6JE30 1 unit 0 700 Access lock to CASTELL FORTRESS 1 unit A 3WX36 63 6JE10 tunit on req or KIRK KEY lock when the key is removed the key opening is covered lockable with up to 4 padlocks 1 Locks must be ordered from the manufacturer 2 Locks with special closure must be ordered according to Catalog LV10 Controlgear for industry section 9 Control and signaling devices 3 The locking device for padlocks cannot be used together with a safety lock instead of an OFF button 4 Can be retrofitted to circuit breakers supplied after 01 July 1998 5 The 3WX36 63 6JE locking system meets the isolation conditions to IEC 60947 1 and IEC 60947 1 A1 5 112 Siemens LV 30 2004 This quantity or a multiple thereof can be ordered Circuit Breakers up to 3200 A Discontinued Series When retrofitting the circuit breaker Order No must Accessories spare parts be added to the name plate on the operator panel and to the side wall of the circuit
173. kV 4 4 4 4 4 Control circuits kV E5 2 0 25 25 25 Isolating function to EN 60947 2 yes yes yes yes yes Utilization category B except switching capacity class DC Permissible ambient temperature in operation in operation with LCD max 55 C C 25 70 25 70 25 70 25 70 25 70 Storage special conditions for LCDs must be observed C 40 70 40 70 40 70 40 70 40 70 Permissible load up to 55 C Cu bare A 2500 3200 4000 5000 5920 up to 60 C Cu bare A 2500 3020 4000 5000 5810 up to 70 C Cu painted A 2280 2870 4000 5000 5500 black Power loss at J with AC symmetrical load Fixed mounted circuit breaker W 270 410 520 630 900 Withdrawable circuit breaker W 520 710 810 1050 1600 Operating times Make time ms 35 35 35 35 35 Break time ms 34 34 34 34 34 Electr make time via activation solenoid ms 100 100 100 100 100 Electr break time via shunt release ms ie 73 73 73 73 Electr break time instantaneous undervoltage release ms ie T3 73 13 73 Break time through ETU instantaneous short circuit ms 50 50 50 50 50 release Service life mechanical without maint Operating cycles 10000 10000 5000 5000 5000 mechanical with maint Operating cycles 15000 15000 10000 10000 10000 electrical without maint Operating cycles 7500 4000 2000 2000 2000 1000 V design Operating cycles 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 electrical with maint Operating cycles 15000 15000 10000 10000 10000 Operating frequency 690 V desi
174. learance to grounded parts Siemens LV 30 2004 5 66 Optional connection variants Front connection single hole up to 4000 A 62 5 M NSE00666b Edao e 169 5 Front connection double hole to DIN 43673 up to 4000 A 4825 NSE00669 NSE00672a Flange connection up to 4000 A NSE00675 840 a 630 l L Q O t NSE0_00667c w 160 160 E am Im 35 I 13 5 a NSEO_00670c 373 40 14 a 57 ry ssk 210 ae 210 590 gt 80 ieee m ole 287 A Lit 1 800 840 ry 630 gt vy 7 N Oo ro 704 gt NSEO_00673b rlegl 287 b t 210 914 59e gt 59 NSE0_00676a m 282 5 M 12 69 287 Rated circuit breaker curren A 4000 5000 6300 a b 40 210 40 210 5 245 I 69 287 Safety clearances to grounded parts as well as to live parts see page 5
175. locking module and a Bowden wire An additional Bowden wire must be ordered separately for each circuit breaker gt E NSEO_01141 o O00 W O 0 O00 W 000 0O0 0 000J 0 gt _ oo _ Q 3 circuit breakers alongside each other Two circuit breakers can be closed and opened independently of each other while the third is only ready to close when the two others are open If the third circuit breaker is closed the other two circuit breakers cannot be closed All three circuit breakers each have an interlocking module and a Bowden wire A Bowden wire must be ordered separately cA D 6 gt D is A 0000 Ww gt io N NSEO_01142 o 0O0 0 o 00 Siemens LV 30 2004 Circuit Breakers up to 3200 A Discontinued Series General data Transfer control device The transfer control device allows automatic network switcho vers from a standard network supply to an emergency network supply Standard and emergency network supply AC 380 400 V A transformer is generally used for standard network supplies The emergency network supply is usually provided by a gener ator or transformer The transfer control device monitors the infeed side of both cir cuit breakers If the standard network supply fails the emer gency network is switched on automatically When the standard network returns it is also reactivated automatically The switchover requires two circuit breakers
176. longside each other or one above the other whereby the spacing of the circuit breakers is determined solely by the length of the Bowden cable The Bowden cables are supplied in standard lengths of 2 m Inter lock signals are looped through via the Bowden cables Inter locking is only effective in the connected position in the case of withdrawable circuit breakers The mechanical lifetime of the Bowden cables is 10 000 operat ing cycles 3WN6 circuit breaker 4 pole with interlocking module and Bowden wire The interlocking module is mounted on the right hand side of the fixed mounted circuit breaker see illustration or the guide frame Interlocking module with Bowden wire Example Version Switch status Description 1 A B 2 circuit breakers alongside each other One circuit breaker can only be closed when the other has been switched off Each circuit breaker has an interlocking module and a Bowden wire Zq f NSEO_01139 o O O0 3 circuit breakers one above the other Any two circuit breakers can always be closed with the third one being interlocked Each circuit breaker has an interlocking module and a Bowden wire An additional Bowden wire must be ordered separately for each circuit breaker ISEO_01140 rh 3 circuit breakers one above the other When one circuit breaker is closed the other two circuit breakers cannot be closed The interlocking mechanism of each circuit breaker consists of an inter
177. mens LV 30 2004 Circuit Breakers Non Automatic Circuit Breakers up to 6300 A Operator panel The operator panel is designed to protrude from a cutout in the door providing access to all operator controls and displays with the door closed The operator panels for all circuit breakers fixed mounted with drawable designs 3 4 pole are identical The operator panel ensures degree of protection IP20 Safety and reliability To protect the circuit breakers and plant against unauthorized switching as well as the maintenance and operator personnel the system contains many blocking devices Others can be ret rofitted Other safety features include e Incoming supply from above or below as required e Locking of the guide frame with the circuit breaker removed as standard e Locking of the withdrawable circuit breaker against movement as standard e High degree of protection with cover IP55 e Mechanical closing lockout after overload or short circuit trip ping as standard e The circuit breaker is always equipped with the required num ber of auxiliary supply connectors e Devices with electronic overcurrent trip units from ETU45B and higher are always equipped with temperature sensors on BSS and COM15 module Standard version SENTRON WL circuit breakers are equipped with the following features as standard e Mechanical ON and OFF pushbutton e Manual drive with mechanical request e Switch position indication e R
178. module is equal to the max rated type current If a lower rated current is required adaptation by order code on page 5 37 2 Permissible short time current rating J and rated short circuit making capacity Iom for non automatic circuit breakers see Page 5 20 3 Required accessories PROFIBUS communication interface or Measure 6 ETU45B to rua aii protection module GFM AT alarm ment function Plus Order No with Z and order code F02 or FO5 and tripping see Page 5 46 respectively see Page 5 38 E Start of delivery on request This quantity or a multiple thereof can be ordered Siemens LV 30 2004 5 33 Circuit Breakers Non Automatic Circuit Breakers up to 6300 A SENTRON WL 4 pole withdrawable design Size Max rated Rated current ECO switching capacity N PS Weight Standard switching capacity S PS Weight circuit breaker Jn Icu 440 V per PU Igy 440 V per PU current In max Cicer Ne approx approx Order No supplements see Page 5 36 kg kg 630 630 50 B 3WL11 06 20045 tunit 54 000 65 B 3WL11 06 30045 1 unit 54 000 800 800 50 B 3WL11 08 20045 tunit 54 000 65 B 3WL11 08 30045 1 unit 54 000 1000 1000 50 B 3WL11 10 20045 tunit 54 000 65 B 3WL11 10 30045 1 unit 54 000 1250 1250 50 B 3WL11 12 20045 tunit 54 000 65 B 3WL11 12 30045 1 unit 54 000 1600 1600 50 B 3WL11 16 20045 tunit 54 000 65 B 3WL11 16 30045 Tunit 54 000 Il 800 800 80 B 3WL12 0
179. mounting level lateral each mm 20 50 20 50 100 100 50 100 100 50 100 100 50 225 20 100 100 20 100 100 50 200 149 behind mm 20 125 14 14 14 14 20 140 125 14 30 14 14 14 20 125 125 14 14 14 14 14 2 40 mm Size II 70 mm for plates which hide lateral apertures in the with drawable frame All Safety distances above circuit breaker refer to the upper edge of auxiliary plug and not to the upper edge of the arc chute See dimension drawings on pages 5 61 to 5 66 parts 4 and 5 Circuit Breakers Non Automatic Circuit Breakers up to 6300 A SENTRON WL Project planning aids Size I up to 1600 A fixed mounted design 3 and 4 pole Standard design Horizontal connection 439 5 123 5 275 NSE00611 A 1 60 5 NSE0_00614b Z Eoo ne 8 gt 474 33 5 i a 43 Py 2 rey 3 t i 3 X lo 1 B o 1 T S 5 5 e e 45 e A 6 150 gt a 210 106 F me 230 127 e H 320 6 8 i a Z NSE00620 H 410 __ 3 senl 90 90 90 4 pole design 1 Mounting space for removal of the arc chutes 3 Slots 4 mm wide 5 mm deep for supporting phase barriers in the system
180. n Circuit breaker section 3 pole mm 500 x 460 x 380 500 x 460 x 380 800x460 x 380 800 x 460 x 380 width x height x depth Service position 30 30 30 30 and g s or NSE0_00061 NSE0_00062 NSE00927 Main conductor Qty 2 4 4 4 4 minimum mm 6 4x127 6 4x63 5 6 4x 102 JOs JA 10 x 120 cross sections or 1 4x5 1 4x2 1 2 1 4x4 1 4 x 59 1 4 x 5 inches Auxiliary conductors Cu Standard connection strain relief clamp Max no of without end sleeve auxiliary conductors x cross with end sleeve to section solid stranded DIN 46228 T 2 with twin end sleeve optional connection tension spring without end sleeve with end sleeve to 2 x 1 5 mm AWG 16 1 x 2 5 mm AWG 14 2 x 0 5 mm AWG 20 1 x 1 5 mm AWG 16 1 x 0 5 mm AWG 20 2 x 0 5 mm AWG 20 2 x 1 5 mm AWG 16 2 x 2 5 mm AWG 14 5 mm AWG 20 2 x 1 5 mm AWG 16 2x0 2 x 0 5 mm AWG 20 DIN 46228 T 2 Weights 3 pole Fixed mounted circuit breaker kg 59 64 82 82 Withdrawable circuit breaker kg 63 68 88 88 Guide frame kg 39 45 60 60 1 Make time via activation solenoid for synchronization purposes short time excited 50 ms 2 Maintenance means replace the main contact elements and arc chutes see Operator s Guide 3 1 4 x 5 for fixed mounted circuit breakers on request Siemens LV 30 2004 5 69 Circuit Breakers Approved acc to UL 489 up to 5000 A SENTRO
181. n it is pressed and prevents the circuit breaker closing until the latching is reset by rotating the mushroom button Locking device against closing A flap of the locking device covers the electrical ON button and continuously depresses the mechanical OFF button The locking device can be secured with up to 4 padlocks General data CASTELL FORTRESS or KIRK KEY lock These locking devices are supplied with a mounting set The lock must be ordered from the manufacturer of the locks When the lock is activated the circuit breaker is locked against closing The disconnection condition is fulfilled in the OFF position An additional access block with a flap for CASTELL FORTRESS and KIRK KEY locks prevents insertion of the key This device can be locked with up to four padlocks Locking device against moving the withdrawable circuit breaker Access to the crank hole and application of the crank is pre vented by means of one or more padlocks An additional safety ock which can be supplied on request also prevents access to the crank hole in position key can be removed This also pre vents movement of the withdrawable circuit breaker in the guide frame Locking device in the cabinet door A safety lock which is fixed to the cabinet door prevents the circuit breaker from closing Interlocking is only effective in the connected position in the case of withdrawable circuit break ers The signal is transmitted via a Bowden wire F
182. nd fault protection characteristic tdependent function Setting range for delay time fg at Pt Zone Selective Interlocking G function Parameter sets switchable Switchable between parameter sets A and B IR NSE0_00888b SVS tg NSE0O_00889a LCD Alphanumeric LCD 4 line E Graphical LCD 24 V external power supply required Communication CubicleBUS integrated Communication capable via PROFIBUS DP Measurement function Measurement function capable with meas func tion meas function Plus LED display Electronic trip unit active v Alarm v v ETU fault mM L release S release l release N release NSE00890 G release ar G alarm Release via extended protection function Communication Signals from signaling switches with external CubicleBUS modules Opto or relays Overload warning Load shedding load receiving Leading signal overload release 200 ms Temperature alarm Phase unbalance Instantaneous short circuit release Short time delayed short circuit release S Overload release Neutral conductor release Ground fault protection release Ground fault alarm Auxiliary relay ETU fault RIRIS NRIS LINSISINSISINS NSE00891
183. ndication of switch position 11 Guide frame Left 3WN6 circuit breaker withdrawable version size 3 pole Right 3WN6 circuit breaker fixed mounted version size I 3 pole Motorized operating mechanism 5 82 Siemens LV 30 2004 12 Guide rails 13 Auxiliary circuit plug in system 14 Crank hole 15 Hand lever 16 Position indicator switch 17 Transparent cover Electronic trip unit Circuit Breakers up to 3200 A Discontinued Series General data i Benefits i Design Safety and reliability e High degree of protection with door sealing frame in the case of exclusively local operation of the circuit breaker e Incoming supply from above or below as required e Locking of the withdrawable circuit breaker against moving as standard e Locking of the guide frame with the circuit breaker removed as standard e Alarm switch for overload and short circuit tripping with mechanical closing lockout Easy to operate e Unambiguous ON OFF indicator with auxiliary switch for signal e Ready to close indicator with alarm switch as safety standard Modular Many components such as auxiliary releases motorized oper ating mechanisms electronic trip units and current transformers can be replaced or retrofitted to adapt the circuit breaker to changing requirements Communication capable see illustration Communication via PROFIBUS DP The international standard PROFIBUS DP can be used to trans mit
184. ng mechanism Manual operating mechanism ns 7 This saves time and effort during with mechanical closing planning project engineering ordering and stock keeping and consequently 14th position 1st auxiliary switch Shunt release EIEN F above all it saves costs AC 50 60 Hz 110 V The example opposite explains the various positions within an 15th position 2nd auxiliary switch Without 2nd auxiliary release Its A order number 16th position Auxiliary switches 2 NO 2 NC SR 2 Accessories with first order components are already mounted Example 3w11 2 1 6 4 JIGI 3 4J FIAI3 3 F02 Additional accessory components can r be ordered ready mounted Z with order code Communication connection i 090 lt 709 3 F 0 2 pa Peemans arg ddentnga Standard Breaker Status Sensor BSS 7 communication module COM15 for con Even with additional components one nection to PROFIBUS DP Order No is sufficient Accessories for retrofitting components for subsequent fitting Example Additional accessories which are not a intended to be ready mounted in the 3wL9 7 4 1 LO BIAI 2 1 O Al AI 0 factory such as spare parts for storage Protective cover for mechanical ON OFF can also be ordered separately from without lock the circuit breaker Accessories for retrofitting are identified by the item No 3WL9 Documentation Operator s Guide German En
185. nit 0 010 closing 5 digit operating cycles counter 1 unit A 3WX36 64 0CA00 1 unit on req Auxiliary release Rated control supply voltage AC 50 60 Hz DC V V Shunt release f for 24 1 unit A 3WX36 51 1JB00 1 uni 0 800 1st and 2nd auxiliary release F1 and F2 30 A 3WX36 51 1JE00 1 uni 0 800 and closing solenoid Y1 48 A 3WX36 51 1JF00 1 uni 0 800 60 A 3WX36 51 1JG00 1 uni 0 800 110 127 110 125 A 3WX36 51 1JH00 1 uni 0 800 220 240 220 250 A 3WX36 51 1JK00 1 uni 0 800 Undervoltage release r F3 24 1 unit A 3WX36 53 1JB00 1 uni 0 800 instantaneous 0 ms short delay 200 ms 7 30 A 3WX36 53 1JE00 1 uni 0 500 48 A 3WX36 53 1JF00 1 uni 0 500 60 A 3WX36 53 1JG00 1 uni 0 500 110 127 110 125 A 3WX36 53 1JH00 1 uni 0 800 220 240 220 250 A 3WX36 53 1JK00 1 uni 0 800 380 415 A 3WX36 53 1JM00 1 uni 0 800 U t Undervoltage release rc 110 127 1 unit A 3WX36 54 1JH00 1 uni 0 850 lt F8 220 240 A 3WX36 54 1JK00 1 uni 0 850 can be delayed 0 2 3 2 s 380 415 A 3WX36 54 1JM00 1 uni 0 850 Auxiliary switches 2 CO 1 set A 3WX36 16 1CE00 1 se 0 070 Motorized operating consisting of motor closing solenoid Y1 mechanism and electrical ON button and wiring electrical closing possible if Rated control supply voltage 11th position of Order No for Motor Closing solenoid circuit breaker is 0 AC 50 60 Hz DC AC 50 60 Hz DC V V V V 110 127 110 125 110 127 110 125 1 set A 3WX36 31 1JH00 1 set 2 400 D 220 240 220 250 220 240 2
186. nit 190 000 1115 5000 5000 100 C 3WL13 50 401046 1 unit 190 000 With guide frame vertical main circuit connection 800 800 100 B 3WL12 08 40047 1 unit 109 000 l 1000 1000 100 B 3WL12 10 40047 1 unit 109 000 1250 1250 100 B 3WL12 12 40047 1 unit 109 000 1600 1600 100 B 3WL12 16 40047 1 unit 109 000 l 2000 2000 100 B 3WL12 20 40047 1 unit 109 000 2500 2500 100 B 3WL12 25 40047 1 unit 123 000 l 3200 3200 100 B 3WL12 32 40047 1 unit 136 000 111 4000 4000 100 C 3WL13 40 40047 1 unit 190 000 111 5000 5000 100 C 3WL13 50 40047 1 unit 190 000 1115 6300 6300 100 C 3WL13 63 40047 1 unit 227 000 With guide frame connecting flange 800 800 100 B 3WL12 08 40048 1 unit 109 000 l 1000 1000 100 B 3WL12 10 40048 1 unit 109 000 l 1250 1250 100 B 3WL12 12 40048 1 unit 109 000 1600 1600 100 B 3WL12 16 40048 1 unit 109 000 2000 2000 100 B 3WL12 20 40048 1 unit 109 000 2500 2500 100 B 3WL12 25 40048 1 unit 123 000 3200 3200 100 B 3WL12 32 40048 1 unit 136 000 1119 4000 4000 100 C 3WL13 40 40048 1 unit 190 000 Order No supplements Non automatic circuit breakers without electronic trip unit AA without electronic trip unit communication measurement function optional a AB Electronic trip units Design without ground fault protection ETU15B protection functions LI BB ETU25B
187. nit 70 000 B 3WL9213 8BDOO ODA 1 1 unit 119 000 Main circuit connection connecting flange 1000 B 8WL9 211 1AEQOO ODA 1 tunit 25 000 B 3WL9211 1BEOO O0A 1 1 unit 30 000 l 1600 B 38WL9 211 2AEO0 ODA 1 tunit 25 000 B 3WL9 211 2BEO00 O00A 1 1 unit 30 000 2000 B 8WL9 212 3AEOO ODA 1 tunit 31 000 B 3WL9212 3BEOO O0A 1 1 unit 37 000 2500 B 8WL9 212 4AEDO ODA 1 tunit 39 000 B 3WL9212 4BEOO O0A 1 1 unit 47 000 3200 B 38WL9 212 5AEOO ODA 1 tunit 45 000 B 3WL9212 5BEOO O0A 1 1unit 54 000 Ul 4000 B 8WL9 213 6AEOO ODA 1 tunit 60 000 B 3WL9213 6BEO0O O0A 1 1unit 84 000 Number of auxiliary supply connectors none 0 0 1 connector 1 1 2 connectors 2 2 3 connectors 3 3 4 connectors 4 4 Required number of auxiliary supply connectors see table on page 5 44 Type of auxiliary circuit connections without 0 0 with screw type terminals SIGUT 1 1 with screwless connection system 2 2 tension spring Position indicator switches without Option 1 1 1 connected position 1 changeover test position 1 changeover disconnected position 1 changeover Option 2 2 2 connected position 3 changeovers test position 2 changeovers disconnected position 1 changeover Shutters without A A with shutter Size B B 2 parts Size Il lockable Size III Add Z to the complete Order No Order No with Z 1234567 8 9101112 13141516 and indicate the appropriate order code s and additional order 3WL921 Z code 0o00 Rated voltage AC
188. nly with ground fault prot mod s only with ground fault prot mod s only with ground fault prot mod Auxiliary relay v A v ETU fault v v v Setting range of the operating current Ig Size I and Size Il Size Tl A 100 A 400A B 300 A 600 A Cc 600 A 800 A D 900 A 1000 A E 1200 A 1200 A Siemens LV 30 2004 Circuit Breakers Non Automatic Circuit Breakers up to 6300 A SENTRON WL 3 pole fixed mounted design Wi selection and ordering data Size Max rated circuit Rated current ECO switching capacity N PS Weight Standard switching capacity S PS Weight breaker current J T y 440 V per PU I 440 V per PU Aa oeno approx approx Order No supplement see Page 5 36 A A kA DT kg kg Horizontal main circuit connection 630 630 50 B 3WL11 06 20032 1unit 43 000 65 B 3WL11 06 30032 1 unit 43 000 800 800 50 B 3WL11 08 20032 1unit 43 000 65 B 3WL11 08 30032 1 unit 43 000 1000 1000 50 B 3WL11 10 20032 1unit 43 000 65 B 3WL11 10 30032 1 unit 43 000 1250 1250 60 B 3WL11 12 20032 tunit 43 000 65 B 3WL11 12 301032 1 unit 43 000 1600 1600 50 B 3WL11 16 20032 1unit 43 000 65 B 3WL11 16 30032 1 unit 43 000 800 800 80 B 3WL12 08 301032 1 unit 56 000 1000 1000 80 B 3WL12 10 301032 1 unit 56 000 1250 1250 80 B 3WL12 12 30032 1 unit 56 000 1600 1600 80 B 3WL12 16 301032 1 unit 56 000 2000 2000 65 B 3WL12
189. ns LV 30 2004 Circuit Breakers Non Automatic Circuit Breakers up to 6300 A SENTRON WL Add Z to the complete Order No and Order Order No with Z indicate the appropriate order code s code 1234567 89101112 13141516 JWL e kw Se we ee Z and additional order code s 000 Identification code for Further versions Z For fixed mounted circuit breakers Order code To select this connection system the 12th for 3 and digit of the Order No for the 4 pole circuit breaker must be a 2 Connection system for main circuit connections Top Size up to 1600 A accessible from front Size Il up to 2000 A double hole Size Il up to 2500 A Bottom Size Il up to 3200 A NO0 accessible from front Size III up to 4000 A single hole Top Size up to 1600 A rear horizontal Size II up to 2000 A Bottom Size Il up to 2500 A accessible from front Size Il up to 3200 A NO single hole Size III up to 4000 A Top Size up to 1600 A rear vertica Size Il up to 2000 A Bottom Size II up to 2500 A accessible from front Size II up to 3200 A NGI single hole Size III up to 4000 A Top Size I up to 1600 A accessible from front Size II up to 2000 A single hole Size II up to 2500 A Bottom Size Il up to 3200 A NGIA accessible from front Size III up to 4000 A double hole Top Size up to 1600 A rear horizontal Size Il up to 2000 A Bottom Size II up to 250
190. ntrol systems the de mands made on air circuit breakers in terms of operator control and monitoring of network processes have increased The extensive coordinated SENTRON range of devices covers all applications between 16 A and 6300 A with compact and air circuit breakers The AC devices are available as circuit breakers and non auto matic circuit breakers DC devices are only available as non au tomatic circuit breakers Specifications SENTRON WL circuit breakers satisfy e IEC 60947 2 e DIN VDE 0660 Part 101 e climate proof to DIN IEC 68 Part 30 2 Also available with UL 489 For further specifications see Annex e Rated currents 630 A to 6300 A e 3 sizes for different rated current ranges see illustration Over view of SENTRON WL circuit breakers non automatic circuit breakers e 3 and 4 pole versions e Rated operational voltage up to AC 690 V and 1000 V Special versions up to AC 1000 V available e 3 different switching capacity classes in the range from 50 kA to 100 kA for AC applications and one switching capacity class for DC applications The SENTRON WL circuit breakers are supplied complete with operating mechanism manual operating mechanism with me chanical closing electronic overcurrent trip unit and auxiliary switches 2 NO contacts 2 NC contacts in the standard ver sion and can be equipped with auxiliary releases Installation types Fixed mounted or withdrawable version Ambient temperat
191. o 3200 A Discontinued Series eE ELE Comprehensive additional functions in accordance with the design of the electronic trip unit e g L NSE0_01130 e Short time delay short circuit release with t dependent delay for improved discrimination to the downstream fuses e Short circuit protection with Zone Selective Interlocking for significant reduction of the stress and damage in a distribution system thanks to short delay times e Load shedding load receiving e Communication via PROFIBUS DP e LCD operating current display Ground fault protection e Description Ground fault releases g sense fault currents that flow to ground and that can cause fire in the plant Multiple circuit breakers connected in series can have their delay times ad justed so as to provide graduated discrimination When setting the parameters for the electronic trip unit it is pos sible to choose between Alarm on detection and Trip circuit breaker on detection The reason for tripping is indicated by means of an LED when the query button is activated e Measurement methods Vectorial summation formation with current transformer in neutral conductor The neutral conductor current is measured directly and is evaluated for neutral conductor overload protection The electronic trip unit determines the ground fault current by means of vectorial summation current formation for the three phase currents and the N conductor current
192. odules Closing solenoid auxiliary release Auxiliary conductor plug in system Auxiliary switch block Door sealing frame Interlocking set for baseplate Transparent panel function insert 5 4 Siemens LV 30 2004 integrated CubicleBUS aabbb aed t 7 p d d Jp A id EMERGENCY STOP pushbutton key operated Motorized operating mechanism Operating cycles counter Breaker status sensor BSS Electronic overcurrent trip unit ETU Reset solenoid Breaker data adapter BDA 4 line LCD module Ground fault protection module Rating plug Measuring function module Circuit breaker Circuit Breakers Non Automatic Circuit Breakers up to 6300 A SENTRON WL General data C Benefits m Design Low space requirements The SENTRON WL devices require very little space Size devices up to 1600 A fit into a 400 mm wide switchgear panel Size III devices up to 6300 A are the smallest of their kind and with their construction width of 704 mm fit into a 800 mm wide switchgear panel Modular design Components like auxiliary releases motorized operating mech anisms overcurrent trip units current sensors auxiliary circuit signaling switches automatic reset devices and interlocks can all be exchanged or retrofitted at a later stage thus allowing the circuit breaker to be adapted to new changing requirements The main contact elements can all be replaced in orde
193. on Setting range for time lag class tp at Pt 10 s fixed 2 3 5 5 5 8 10 14 17 21 25 30 s Ip Setting range for time lag class fg at rt 1 2 3 4 5 s Thermal image v on off using sliding dolly switch Phase loss sensitivity at ta 20 ms M at ta 20 ms M tr Neutral conductor protection v Function can be switched on off v using sliding dolly switch N conductor setting range Iy Ip os Short time delayed short circuit protection v v Function can be switched on off v using rotary coding switch _ Se ting range Igq Ip X 1 25 1 5 2 2 5 3 4 6 8 10 12 1 25 1 5 2 2 5 3 4 6 8 10 12 Setting range for delay time tsa 0 M 100 200 300 400 M 100 200 300 400 ms a Switchable short time delayed short circuit protection v using rotary coding switch Isa I t dependent function Setting range for delay time tg at Pt 100 200 300 400 ms Zone Selective Interlocking function by CubicleBUS module Instantaneous short circuit protection v v Function can be switched on off v using rotary coding switch Setting range J I x fixed for J 2 20 x In max 50 kA 1 5 2 2 3 4 6 8 10 12 0 8 x Ics NSEO0_00888b Ground fault protection QO Module can be retrofitted Tripping and alarm function v Tripping function can be switched on off v using rotary coding switch Detection of the ground fault current via summation cur v rent formation with internal or external neutral conductor Ig transformer Detection of ground fault current vi
194. on against flashover Siemens LV 30 2004 Circuit Breakers up to 3200 A Discontinued Series Accessories spare parts Selection and ordering data For fixed mounted and withdrawable circuit breakers Current transformers for neutral conductor overload protection and ground fault protection Only one of the two measuring methods is permissible in conjunction with the electronic trip unit The overload protection for the neutral con ductor takes effect when the current transformer is fitted in the neutral conductor The ground fault current is calculated by means of sum mation current formation of the phases and the neutral conductor In the case of electronic trip unit version P overload protection in the neutral conductor is achievable with 4 transformers in L1 L2 L3 N and ground fault protection by summation current formation or with a 5th transformer in the neutral point direct measurement of the ground fault current and overload protection in the neutral conductor without summation current formation Type of detection see Page 5 88 Elec Primary 5th and 9th posi Required DT For 1 set RSi Weight Designation tronic trip rated cur tions of order or 1 unit per PU unit ver rent Order No for quantity approx sion of the circuit breaker per circuit trans 3WN6C 01 breaker former a o _ Vectorial summation with current transformer in the neutral con ductor Current transformers for
195. on and remote closing remain possible The lock is only activated when the key is re moved Secure OFF switch independent locking device against unau thorized closin This special switch independent function for withdrawable cir cuit breakers prevents closing and fulfills the specifications for main switches to EN 60204 VDE 0113 disconnector unit Un authorized closing remains impossible even after the circuit breaker has been exchanged To activate the lock the circuit breaker must be opened The locking device is disabled when the circuit breaker is closed The lock is only activated when the key is removed The safety key can only be removed in the OFF position Siemens LV 30 2004 5 9 Circuit Breakers Non Automatic Circuit Breakers up to 6300 A SENTRON WL eE ELE Locking device for manual crank Prevents removal of the crank The circuit breaker is protected against movement The lock is only activated when the key is re moved Locking device for mechanical OFF Prevents unauthorized mechanical opening from the operator panel The mechanical OFF button can only be activated if the key is inserted key operation Remote opening remains possi ble The lock is only activated when the key is removed Locking device for hand operated lever The hand operated lever can be locked with a padlock The stor age spring cannot be loaded manually Locking device against resetting the t
196. on of the transfer control device Siemens LV 30 2004 5 95 Circuit Breakers up to 3200 A Discontinued Se e Yal ye ELE E Technical specifications Size l ll Type 3WN6 0 3WN6 2 3WN6 4 3WN6 5 3WN6 6 3WN6 7 Rated current J at 55 C Main conductor A 630 1000 1600 2000 2500 3200 at50 c0Hz Neutral conductor A 630 1000 1600 2000 2500 3200 only on 4 pole vers Rated operating voltage Ue AC V up to 690 at 50 60 Hz Rated impulse Main circuits kV 18 withstand voltage Uimp Auxiliary circuits kV 4 Utilization category B Rated short circuit up to AC 415 V kA 143 176 making capacity Icm up to AC 500 V kA 143 176 peak value up to AC 690 V kA 110 110 Rated service short circuit up to AC 415 V kA 65 80 breaking capacity Ies up to AC 500 V kA 65 80 rms value up to AC 690 V kA 50 50 Rated ultimate short circuit up to AC 415 V kA 65 80 breaking capacity Icu up to AC 500 V kA 65 80 rms value up to AC 690 V kA 50 50 Permissible ambient temperatures Operation C 20 70 Storage C 40 80 Rated short time withstand current Zew 0 5s kA 50 50 65 at 50 60 Hz 1s kA 35 50 Y 50 65 Bs kA 25 30 i 30 60 3s kA 20 25 D 25 50 4s kA 17 20 20 40 Permissible load up to 55 C A 630 1000 1600 2000 2500 3200 for fixed mounted and withdrawable circuit at 60 C A 630 1000 1600 2000 2350 2860 breakers at cabinet interior temperature at 70 C A 630 1000 1530 2000 2330 2650 Rated
197. on req Normal lock no 73034 Mounting set for CASTELL or FORTRESS lock 1 set A 3WX36 68 1JE00 1 set on req Interlock to be obtained from the lock manufac turer CASTELL lock FS 2 or FORTRESS lock H31LH 65 standard f Auxiliary supply 1 unit A 3WX36 25 1JC00 1 uni 0 080 ial connectors Lb Blocking device to prevent opening of the cabinet door with the 1 unit A 38WX36 67 2JA00 1 uni 0 700 fixed mounted circuit breaker closed to prevent closing of the circuit breaker with the 1 unit A 38WX36 67 1JA00 1 uni 0 700 cabinet door open Arc chute cover up to 1600 A 3 pole 1 unit B 3WX36 14 0GA00 1 unit on req 4 pole 1 unit B 3WX36 14 0HA00 tunit on req 2000 and 3200 A Il 3 pole 1 unit B 3WX36 14 0KA00 1 unit on req 4 pole 1 unit B 3WX36 14 0LA00 1 unit on req For guide frames MS Connecting bar for up to 1000 A 3 and 4 pole 1 unit A 3WX36 23 1AA00 1 unit on req sfje additional terminal Pl 5 are fromthe 4250 and 1600 A 3 and 4 pole 1 unit A 3WX3623 1BA00 1 unit on req wW 2 Vertical single hole bar ANN Vertical double hole bar up to 1000 A 3 and 4 pole 1 unit A 3WX36 23 1AA01 1 unit on req 3 holes to DIN 43673 k 8 1250 and 1600 A 3 and 4 pole 1 unit A 3WX36 23 1BA01 1 unit on req ol fal 2 Connecting bar for rear up to 1000 A 3 and 4 pole 1 unit A 3WX36 23 3AA00 1 unit on req vertical connection 1250 and 1600 A 3 and 4 pole 1 unit A 3WX36 23 3BA00 1 unit on req 2000 A Il 3 pole 1 set 3 units A 3WX36 23 4AB00 1
198. on solenoid suitable for synchronizing tasks Short circuit protection Smallest permissible DIAZED fuse operational class gL miniature circuit breaker with C characteristic N for DC 24 V DC 48 V DC 60 V DC 110 V DC 220 V AC DC VA W ms ms Manual motor operating mechanism with mechanical and electrical closing Manual operating mechanism Motor Operating range Extended operating range for battery operation for DC 24 V DC 48 V DC 60 V DC 110 V DC 220 V Power input to motor AC DC VA W Time required to charge the stored energy mechanism 1 x Us s Closing solenoid Short circuit protection Motor and activation solenoid for the same rated control supply voltages For motor and closing solenoid Smallest permissible DIAZED fuse operational class gL miniature circuit breaker with C characteristic at Us 24V at Us 110 127 V at Us 220 250 V 210 5 see Manual operating mechanism with stored energy feature with mechanical closing 0 7 1 1 x Us 0 7 1 26 x Us 15 60 80 1 A TDz time lag 1 A see Manual operating mechanism with stored energy feature with mechanical closing OTa dal x Uh 0 7 1 26 x Us 40 20 see Manual operating mechanism with stored energy feature with mechanical and electrical closing 2 A TDz time lag 2 A 1 ATDz time lag 1 A 1 ATDz time lag 1 A Auxiliary releases Shunt Operating value release f F1 F2 Operating range pickup For
199. options are available connection hole or double hole connection e Accessible from the front one hole for vertically installed busbars e Accessible from the front two holes holes in accordance with DIN 43678 for vertically installed busbars e At the rear vertical for vertically installed busbars E o S p g 2 e Connecting flange for direct connection to guide frame up to 3 i g 3 a 4000 A p F Di 3 Auxiliary circuit connections Horizontal Front connection with single Vertical Flange The type of connection for the auxiliary switches depends on the comeoion foleo ceuli nele connection connection type of installation e Withdrawable version ain current connections connection types The internal auxiliary switches are connected to the male con nector on the switch side When the breaker is fully inserted the blades make a connection with the slide module in the guide frame Various adapters can then be used to complete the wiring see illustration Connection options for auxiliary circuit connections e Fixed mounted version In this case the auxiliary circuit plugs are engaged directly onto the circuit breaker The connectors are equipped with coding pins that prevent them being mistakenly interchanged Screwless connection system tension spring option Connection using screw connection system SIGUT standard NSE0_00975a Connection options for auxiliary circuit connections 5 6 Sie
200. or locking mechanisms please refer to Installation Guide frames e Transparent cover over electronic trip unit The standard transparent cover can be sealed The configura tion sections are covered to prevent unauthorized access Openings allow access to the query and test button A hinged flap covers the whole operator panel of the electronic trip unit e Motor switch An additional motor switch can deactivate automatic loading of the storage spring on closing This means that the control sup ply does not need to be switched off for maintenance mea sures to the circuit breaker e Operating cycles counter A five digit operating cycles counter is available for the 3WN6 circuit breakers The display is incremented by 1 as soon as the storage spring is fully loaded e Auxiliary release Up to two auxiliary releases can be installed at the same time The following are available 1 Operating cycles counter ane 2 Transparent cover over electronic trip unit 1 shunt release 3 Motor switch or 1 undervoltage release 4 Sealing cap for mechanical ON button or 2 shunt releases 5 EMERGENCY STOP button instead of the OFF button or 1 shunt release 6 Safety lock to prevent opening of the crank hole 1 undervoltage release 7 Padlock to prevent opening of the crank hole ngu ia 8 Safety lock instead of the mechanical ON button The shunt release f has been designed for permanent excita 9 Locking device for mechanical OFF button and tion
201. ot 15 gt Cc L ol aloo a 169 5 OT Vertical connection 30 30 11 c ae 6 pais ie i g 400 o5 al Ree pey per Y 38 8 bje NSE0_00651a g 8 3 13 5 Si 11 Ic oe Dn 1 N 2 NT 27 139 138 F m 270 95 i a o 460 e157 i i a 590 a Pas 55 45 130 130 130 F Flange connection 90 90 90 90 je 8 530 z S 400 5 8 Q M 12 90 40 2 5 a g g 2 i i l 3t 2 DE 1 8 3 E A o 3 ims N kez E l Oo S ae m 2 8 5545130 130 1302721 AN i 4 pole design p a 7 T Rated circuit breaker current 3 Slots 4 mm wide 5 mm deep for supporting phase barriers A a b c in the system j B 7 i up to 2000 10 10 10 4 Auxiliary connector with SIGUT screw type terminals 2500 15 15 20 5 Auxiliary connector with tension spring connection 3200 30 30 20 7 SENTRON WL in connected position 8 SENTRON WL in test position Safety clearances to grounded parts as well as to live parts see 9 SENTRON WL in disconnected position page 5 60 10 Fixing holes diameter 10 mm 11 Terminal face 12 Top edge of circuit breaker only AC 1000 V design Clearance to grounded parts 5 64 Siemens LV 30 2004 Circuit Breakers Non Automatic Circuit Breakers up to 6300 A SENTRON WL Project planning aids Size Ill up to 6300 A fixed mounted design 3 and 4 pole Standard design Horizontal connection NSE00655
202. out 2nd auxiliary release A release Shunt release f F2 AC 50 60 Hz V DC V 24 24 B 2 30 E 48 48 F 60 G 110 127 110 125 H 220 240 220 250 K Auxiliary switches 1st auxiliary switch block 2NO 2NC 1 tst 2nd auxiliary switch block 2NO 2NC 2CO 3 5th and 6th positions of the Order No For technical specifications options accessories spare parts see Pages 5 126 to 5 129 and project planning aids see Circuit breakers up to 3200 A discontinued series 5 130 Siemens LV 30 2004
203. ove must be insulated against flashover by interphase barriers or by a busbar cover or by an arc chute cover use Main conductor connection accessory for horizontal or vertical connection only Optional electrical equipment directly above if no arc Terminal screws with strain washers M12 chute cover is used or to the side of the circuit breaker inside diameter 12 mm to DIN 6769 Fst should be protected by a cover Also after the attachment of additional barriers or covers it must be ensured that the Recommended tighteningtorque Nam 20 dissipation of heat from the circuit breaker is not impeded Required strength of screws 8 8 to DIN 267 Siemens LV 30 2004 5 117 Circuit Breakers up to 3200 A Discontinued Series Project planning aids 3WN6 circuit breakers withdrawable version 3 pole Horizontal connection O SA2 5326b SA2 5327a 485 d e SA2 5325b 4 3 5 LN Ahs A He Cj C l a Disconnected position b Test position c Connected position Auxiliary conductor plug in system Guide frame Switchboard door Slots 6 mm deep for line side interphase barriers Holes for attaching the guide frame Center line of circuit breaker SA2 5328b For safety clearances see Page 5 117 Vertical connection SA2 5329a SA2 5330a Rated current a b c d
204. p to 4000 A Top Size up to 1600 A accessible from front Size Il up to 2000 A single hole Size II up to 2500 A Bottom Size Il up to 3200 A PEN front vertical Size III up to 4000 A Top Size up to 1600 A accessible from front Size II up to 2000 A double hole Size II up to 2500 A Bottom Size Il up to 3200 A P1212 rear vertical Size IIl up to 4000 A Top Size up to 1600 A rear horizontal Size Il up to 2000 A Bottom Size Il up to 2500 A rear vertical Size II up to 3200 A PIRIS Ci Size III up to 4000 A Size III up to 5000 A Top Size up to 1600 A connecting flange Size Il up to 2000 A Bottom Size II up to 2500 A rear vertical Size Il up to 3200 A P2141 Size III up to 4000 A Top Size up to 1600 A accessible from front Size II up to 2000 A single hole Size II up to 2500 A Bottom Size Il up to 3200 A P216 connecting flange Size IIl up to 4000 A Top Size up to 1600 A accessible from front Size Il up to 2000 A double hole Size Il up to 2500 A Bottom Size Il up to 3200 A P27 connecting flange Size IIl up to 4000 A Top Size up to 1600 A rear horizontal Size Il up to 2000 A Bottom Size Il up to 2500 A connecting flange Size Il up to 3200 A PIRIS Size IIl up to 4000 A Top Size up to 1600 A rear vertical Size Il up to 2000 A Bottom Size Il up to 2500 A connecting flange Size Il up to 3200 A PIRIS Size Ill up to 4000 A 5 42 Sieme
205. q 1000 A 2 F C 3WX36 43 1CF00 1 unit on req 1250 A 3 G C 3WX36 43 1CG00 1 unit on req 1600 A 4 H C 3WX36 43 1CH00 1 unit on req 1250 A 5 G 1 unit C 3WX36 43 1FG00 1 unit on req 1600 A 5 H C 3WX36 43 1FH00 1 unit on req 2000 A 5 J C 3WX36 43 1FJ00 1unit on req 2500 A 6 K C 3WX36 43 1FK00 1unit on req 3200 A 7 M C 3WX36 43 1FM00 1unit on req Designation Rated control supply voltage Order For 1 set rated operational voltage quantity or 1 unit AC 50 60 Hz DC Storage device 110 127 V 110 115 V 1 unit D 3WX31 56 1JG01 1unit 0 500 for shunt release 220 240 V 220 250 V D 3WX31 56 1JJ01 1 unit 0 500 Rated control supply voltage must match the rated control supply volt age of the shunt release Function tester 110 127 220 240 V 1 unit A 3WX36 47 5JA01 1 unit 1 300 for electronic trip unit for version B C D E F G V N P Also suitable for electronic trip units of 3WN1 and 3WS1 circuit breakers Transfer control device 1 unit D 3WX36 66 7JA00 1unit 11 400 for automatic switchover between two fixed mounted or withdrawable circuit breakers see Page 5 95 Door sealing frame 1 unit A 3WX36 86 0JA00 1 unit 1 000 5 108 Siemens LV 30 2004 This quantity or a multiple thereof can be ordered Circuit Breakers up to 3200 A Discontinued Series Accessories spare parts Designation Order DT For 1 unit RSi Weight quantity Order No per PU approx kg For fixed mounted and withdrawable circuit breakers
206. q Size II B 3WL9111 OBA04 0AA0 junit on req Size III B 3WL9111 0BA10 0AAO 1 unit on req Support bracket B 3WL9111 0BB50 0AA0 1 se 4 800 for mounting fixed mounted circuit breakers on vertical plane 3WL9 111 0AS3 OAAO_ only for sizes and II 1 set 2 units Ee NSE01009 NSEO 0101s NSE01019 3WL9 111 0AR12 0AA0 3WL9 111 OBA02 0AA0 3WL9 111 0BA07 0AA0O 3WL9 111 0BB50 0AAO 1 Not possible with 1000 V version DC version fixed mounted version 2 60 kA switching capacity is achieved with 2 modules each 5 50 Siemens LV 30 2004 This quantity or a multiple thereof can be ordered Circuit Breakers Non Automatic Circuit Breakers up to 6300 A SENTRON WL Accessories spare parts Designation DT Order No PS Weight per PU approx kg CubicleBUS modules Digital output module with rotary coding switch optical coupler outputs B 3WL9 111 0AT25 0AA0 1 unit on req Digital output module with rotary coding switch relay outputs B 3WL9 111 0AT26 0AA0 1 unit on req Digital output module configurable optocoupler outputs B 3WL9 111 0AT30 0AA0 1 unit on req Digital output module configurable relay outputs B 3WL9 111 0AT20 0AA0 1 unit 0 400 NSE 01023 Digital input module B 3WL9 111 0AT27 0AA0 1 unit on req 3WL9 111 0AT23 0AAO Analog output module B 3WL9 111 0AT23 0AA0 1 unit on req Zone Selective Interlocking module B 3WL9 111 0AT21 0AA0 1 unit on req Parameterization systems
207. q set on req 3 NC 2 NC 1 NC pos switch mounted yet 1 unit 2NO 1NO possible if position switch 1 set A 3WX36 84 1JB10 1set on req 2 NC 1 NC with 1 NO 1 NC mounted 1 unit for each position with guide frame order code R13 Shutters Protection against touching the main contacts For 3 pole guide frames for rated current up to 1600 A 1 uni A 3WX36 84 3CA00 1 uni 0 500 2000 A 3200 A 1 uni A 3WX36 84 3DA00 1 unit onreq For 3 pole guide frames for rated current up to 1600 A 1 uni A 3WX36 84 3CB00 1 unit on req 2000 A 3200 A 1 uni A 3WX36 84 3DB00 1 unit on req Arc chute up to 1600 A 3 pole 1 uni B 3WX36 14 0GB00 unit onreq cover 4 pole 1 uni B 3WX36 14 0HB00 1 unit on req 2000 3200 A Il 3 pole 1 uni B 3WX3614 OKB00 unit on req i 4 pole 1 uni B 3WX3614 OLB00 unit onreq fete Auxiliary supply For guide frames for spare parts and retrofitting 1 uni A 3WX36 27 1JA00 1 uni 0 160 connectors For withdrawable circuit breakers Blocking device prevent opening of the cabinet door when circuit breaker is 1 uni A 3WX36 67 1JC00 f unit onreq in connected position o prevent closing with the door open only in connected pos A 3WX36 67 1JB00 1 unit on req o prevent movement with the cabinet door open A 3WX36 67 3JA00 1 unit on req Locking with safety lock Made by CES 1 uni A 3WX36 68 2JA00 1 unit on req device ormal lock no SSG 10 to Pe unauna Locking Made by BKS A 3WX36 68 2JB00 1 unit on req E N e devic
208. r panel and to the side wall of the circuit breaker in accordance with the installation instructions Designation Required order DT For 1 set Bom Weight quantity per cir or 1 unit per PU cuit breaker approx kg For fixed mounted and withdrawable circuit breakers Mutual mechani An interlock module with a Bowden wire 2 m 9 9 cal interlock for one fixed mounted circuit breaker 1 unit A 3WX36 66 3JA00 1 uni 3 000 _ for 83WNG6 circuit for one withdrawable circuit breaker 1 unit A 3WX36 66 4JA00 1 uni 1 000 breaker Interlocking of three circuit breakers additional Bowden wire required for each circuit breaker Bowden wire 2 m 1 unit A 3WX36 66 8JA00 1 uni 0 200 Bowden wire 3 m 1 unit A 3WX36 66 8JA01 1 uni 0 500 Bowden wire 4 5 m A 3WX36 66 8JA02 q unit on req Bowden wire 6 m A 3WX36 66 8JA03 1 unit on req Locking either Safety lock Made by CES 1 unit A 3WX36 63 1JA00 1 uni 0 120 device 3SB1 instead Normal lock no SSG 10 consisting of ofthe OFF Made by BKS A 3WX36 63 1JB00 unit 0 120 safety locks or button Normal lock no 1 padlocks to prevent unau Made by IKON A 3WX36 63 1JC00 1 uni 0 120 thorized closing Normal lock no 360012 K1 of the circuit or Locking device for max 4 padlocks 1 unit A 3WX36 63 1JG00 1 uni 0 200 breaker shackle diameter 4 8 mm with EMERGENCY STOP button self latching 1 unit A 3WX36 61 0JA00 1 uni 0 100 instead of the OFF button Safety loc
209. r reclosing lockout Indicator overcurrent release activated Indicator overload alarm Rated current module Rotary switch for setting value overload release Rotary switch for setting value instantaneous short circuit release Short circuit protection fixed setting Query pushbutton Test pushbutton Option safety lock prevents pressing of reset button after overcurrent release Indicator fault in overcurrent release Sealing ring Test socket Option safety lock prevents pressing of reset button after overcurrent release Indicator fault in overcurrent release Indicator cause of release Rotary switch for delay short circuit release Sealing ring SENTRON WL General data Application Simple building and plant protec tion without time selective grading up to 3200 A Features e Adjustable overload protection with 72t characteristic with preset delay time tg 10 seconds at 6 x IR e Non delayed short circuit pro tection adjustable in the range from 2 to 8 x I e Overload display e Protection function is set by means of the rotary coding switch For technical details see table Function overview of the electronic overcurrent trip unit sys tem under Technical specifica tions Application Classical building motor and plant protection with time selective co ordination for up to 6300 A Features e Adjustable overload protection with t characteristic pres
210. r to in crease the endurance of the circuit breaker Retrofittable modules for electronic overcurrent trip units Modularity is one of the main features of the new SENTRON WL circuit breakers Special LCDs ground fault modules rated current modules and communication modules for the electronic overcurrent trip units are available for retrofitting Rating plugs It is no longer necessary to replace the transformers in order to change the rated current The rating plugs which have been in tegrated into the electronic overcurrent trip units and are easily accessible are exchanged instead In this way the circuit breaker is quickly set to the new rated current and is also marked accordingly Communication The use of modern communication capable circuit breakers opens up completely new possibilities in terms of start up cali bration diagnosis testing maintenance and power manage ment This allows many different ways of reducing costs and improving productivity in industrial plants buildings and infrastructure projects to be achieved E Area of application e As incoming feeder distribution tie and outgoing feeder cir cuit breakers in electrical installations e For switching and protecting motors capacitors generators transformers busbars and cables e Application as an EMERGENCY STOP switch in conjunction with an EMERGENCY STOP device DIN VDE 0113 IEC 60 204 1 Due to the reinforced use of electronic co
211. ransformers for the measurement module must be mounted externally They are mounted on a 35 mm mounting rail The voltage transformers are included in the scope of supply of the measurement module The measurement module cannot be retrofitted Opening closing and locking devices e ON and OFF buttons Mechanical ON button In the standard version the mechanical ON button is a push button In operating mechanisms with electrical closing the mechanical ON button is fitted with a sealing cap As an al ternative to a pushbutton a safety lock CES BKS IKON can also be supplied If the key is removed in the O position it is no longer possible to close the circuit breaker mechanically Electrical ON button The electrical ON button is intended for normal activation during service External electrical interlocks can be imple mented easily using the electrical ON button A sealing cap is available for the electrical ON button Mechanical OFF button In the standard version the mechanical OFF button is a push button An additional sealing cap secures the button against unauthorized operation As an alternative to the OFF button the following are avail able Safety lock The key can be removed in the OFF position to ensure that the circuit breaker cannot be closed mechanically The same key can then be used to unlock another circuit breaker EMERGENCY STOP button This mushroom button latches in the OFF position whe
212. rawable circuit breaker cannot be moved when it is in the ON position e Coding of the rated current between the guide frame and the withdrawable circuit breaker Withdrawable short circuit ground and bridging units Portable positively driven ground and short circuit devices are used for the disconnected system sections to verify isolation from the supply at the workplace Withdrawable grounding units allow simple and comfortable grounding They are simply inserted into the guide frames in place of the corresponding withdrawable circuit breakers This ensures that these devices are always first connected with the ground electrode and then with the components to be grounded The ground terminals are fitted to the side of the switch enclo sure and establish the connection when inserted into the guide frame Short time current of the ground 15 kA 500 ms terminal Rated operational voltage 1000 V Specification DIN VDE 0683 All withdrawable terminals are short circuited and grounded on delivery Qualified electricians can easily convert it to a withdrawable bridging unit by following the enclosed instructions In addition the withdrawable unit can be adapted to each rated current of a frame size Withdrawable short circuit and grounding unit The withdrawable short circuit and grounding unit consists of a breaker enclosure with penetration blades which are connected with the short circuiting link Depending on t
213. rcuit Breakers up to 3200 A Discontinued Series 3 pole fixed mounted design H selection and ordering data Version DT PS Weight per PU approx Rated operating voltage U up to AC 690 V 3WN6HNH1 HEHEHHE EEEE kg Size Size Rated current 7 Adjustment range of rated current J setting current J 630 A 252 630 A A 0 D 1 unit 47 000 1000 A 400 1000 A A 2 F 1 unit 34 000 1600 A 640 1600 A A 4 H 1 unit 36 000 Il 2000 A 800 2000 A A 5 J 1 unit 57 000 2500 A 1000 2500 A A 6 K 1 unit 59 000 3200 A 1280 3200 A A 7 M 1 unit 61 000 Installation type Main terminals see Page 5 85 Fixed mounted Main terminals rear horizontal standard 6 Main connections accessible from front 3 single hole at top and bottom up to 1000 A 1250 A 1600 A 2000 A 2500 A 3200 A Main terminals accessible from front double hole at top and 2 bottom holes in accordance with DIN 43673 up to 1000 A 1250 A 1600 A 2000 A 2500 A 3200 A Electronic Version V zn ov ages Version B azn 0 B functional Version C aznNg oc Bees Version D aznN age Basic functions with LCD display 1 Basic functions and additional functions 2 7 with LCD display Version E aznNg Basic functions with LCD display 1 Basic functions and additional functions 2 7 E with LCD display Version H aznN Basic functions and additional functions 2 7 H Version J aznNg Basic functions and additional functions 2 7 J Version N aznN Basi
214. rimary rated current Th 3WX36 43 1 00 A CA 315 92 60 86 5 140 eae CB 400 CC 500 CD 630 CE 800 CF 1000 CG 1250 CH 1600 FJ 3200 Il 128 80 99 167 5m5 FK 2500 FM 3200 Transfer control device 1150 340 I 400 NSK 8273 284 l I 320 Dimensions for holes outer dimensions NSK 8272 Installation in cabinet side view and front view Siemens LV 30 2004 5 123 Circuit Breakers up to 3200 A Discontinued Series Project planning aids T Circuit diagrams Example of an overall circuit diagram Motor manual operating mechanism with stored energy feature with ready to close signaling switch with electronic trip unit version b azn with overvoltage release r F3 or shunt release f F1 with shunt release f F2 with tripped signaling switch with auxiliary switch 2 NO 2 NC 2 CO with motor switch L1 a L1 L1 L1 L L Le S t S L S rorZz ON PT S m I I A A A A AAAY AA AA A AA _x100j8 ____x100 11_x100 10 _ x200 3 _ x200 __ x10013 x20014 h2 ___ Q01 1 3 5 __x2oo e 4 __foj8_ x100 3 7 5 S10 B azn S1 a ON asn s9 1 2 i i F 4 n R i i F T idl l j s8 ay S11 F5 i M Q01 s7 MECH H Fr tas a ON ope oe
215. ripped indicator A lockable cover prevents manual resetting of the tripped indi cator after overcurrent tripping This locking device is supplied together with the transparent cover for electronic overcurrent trip units Sealing devices Sealing cap for electrical ON button The electrical ON button is equipped with a sealing cap as standard Sealing cap for mechanical ON and OFF buttons The locking set contains covering caps which can be sealed Sealing device for electronic overcurrent trip units The transparent cover can be sealed The configuration sections are covered to prevent unauthorized access Openings allow access to the query and test button Blocking devices Closing lockout when cabinet door is open Ready to close is deactivated mechanically when the cabinet door is open The circuit breaker can neither be mechanically nor electrically closed The blocking signal is transmitted by means of a Bowden wire Blocking device against movement for withdrawable circuit breakers when the cabinet door is open The manual crank is blocked when the cabinet door is open and cannot be removed The withdrawable circuit breaker cannot be moved The lock only affects the inserted manual crank Locking of the control cabinet door The control cabinet door cannot be opened if e the fixed mounted circuit breaker is closed the blocking sig nal is transmitted via the Bowden wire or e if the
216. rmer can be installed directly in the grounded neutral point of a transformer NSE 00946 Three pole circuit breakers current transformers in the neutral conductor Lil L2 L3 1 SENTRON WL N T6 T6 1200 A 1 A NSE 00947 Four pole circuit breakers current transformers in the grounded neutral point of the transformer SENTRON WL NSE 00948 T6 1200 A 1 A Four pole circuit breakers current transformers in the grounded neutral point of the transformer It is also possible to use a summation current transformer si 5 L1 SENTRON WL NSE0_01251 T6 1200 A1A Use of a summation current transformer SENTRON WL General data Setting How the module is set depends on the measurement method used see above Measurement method 1 in position Sum Measurement method 2 in position G This setting can be implemented for the electronic overcurrent trip unit versions ETU55B and ETU76B with Menu Comm Ground fault protection with It characteristic With the exception of the electronic overcurrent trip unit ETU27B all versions of the ground fault modules are supplied with an Pt characteristic which can be activated This characteristic reduces the thermal load of the PE conductor for ground faults with delayed tripping Selection criteria for SENTRON WL circuit breakers Basic criteria for selecting circuit breakers are e Max
217. ronization purposes short time excited 85 ms 2 Maintenance means replace the main contact elements and arc chutes see Operator s Guide 5 68 Siemens LV 30 2004 SENTRON WL General data Size ll lll Type 3WL52 25 3WL52 30 3WL53 40 3WL53 50 Rated current at 40 C at 50 60 Hz Main conductor A 2500 3000 4000 5000 Rated voltage U at 50 60 Hz ACV 600 600 up to 600 Y 347 up to 600 Y 347 Ambient temperature of the system Q 25 40 25 40 25 40 25 40 Power loss at rated current with AC symmetrical load Fixed mounted circuit breaker W 270 410 520 630 Withdrawable circuit breaker W 520 o 810 1050 Operating times Make time ms 35 35 35 35 Break time ms 34 34 34 34 Electr make time via activation solenoid ms 100 100 100 100 Electr break time via shunt release ms 3 T3 13 73 Electr break time instantaneous undervoltage release ms T3 3 13 T3 Break time due to ETU instantaneous short circuit release ms 50 50 50 50 Service life mechanical without maintenance Operating cycles 10000 10000 5000 5000 mechanical with maintenance Operating cycles 15000 15000 10000 10000 electrical without maintenance Operating cycles 4000 4000 1000 1000 Operating frequency 1 h 60 60 60 60 Minimum interval ms 80 80 80 80 between tripping operation by electronic trip unit and next making operation of the circuit breaker only with autom mechanical resetting of the lockout device Minimum dimensio
218. rvice life mechanical without maint Operating cycles 10000 10000 10000 10 000 10000 10000 10000 10000 mechanical with maint Operating cycles 20000 20 000 20000 15000 15000 15000 15000 15000 electrical without maint Operating cycles 10000 10000 10000 7500 7500 7500 7500 7500 1000 V design Operating cycles 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 electrical with maint 9 Operating cycles 20000 20 000 20 000 15000 15000 15000 15000 15000 Operating frequency 690 V design 1 h 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 1000 V design t h 20 20 20 20 20 Minimum interval between tripping operation by over ms 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 current release and next making operation of the cir cuit breaker only with autom mechanical resetting of the lockout device Service position 30 30 30 30 E U and 2 an Lo or rA A T NSEO 00061 NSEO 00062 NSE00927 Degree of protection IP20 without cabinet door IP30 with door mounting frame IP55 with cover Main conductor Copper bars Qty 1x 2 2x ix 1x 2x 2x 3x minimum bare mm 60x10 40x10 50x10 50x10 60x10 40x10 50x10 50x10 Sross sections Copper bars Qty 1x 2x 2x iz 1x 2x 2x gx painted black mm 60x10 40x10 50x10 50x10 60x10 40x10 50x10 50x10 Auxiliary conductors Cu Standard connection strain Max no of relief clamp auxiliary conductors x without end sleeve 2 x 0 5 mm AWG 20 to 2 x 1 5 mm AWG 16 1 x 2 5 mm AWG 14 cross section with end sleeve to 1 x 0 5 mm AWG 20 to 1 x 1 5 mm AWG 16 solid
219. rying and a shunt release e Remote configuration The additional functions and protection functions can be set via the bus The electronic trip unit checks whether the values for the protection parameters are valid and within range Measurement module Z F05 The electronic trip unit versions N and P can be also be equipped with a measurement module please quote the follow ing Order No when ordering Z F05 instead of Z FO1 The measurement module consists of the communication module with additional measurement functions and external voltage transformers In this way the voltage and frequency are ac quired in addition to the current values which makes the follow ing additional operating values available e Voltage UactL UmaxL UminL 15 minute value for max and min ULL ULL2 ULLa conductor conductor voltage e Frequency fact fmax fmin 15 minute value for max and min e Power factor e Active power P e Reactive power Q e Apparent power S e Active work W e Direction of phase rotation These values can be used for energy management by switching loads on off to avoid expensive load peaks Siemens LV 30 2004 5 92 The following signal and protection functions for tripping are available e Asymmetrical phase for voltage and current e Undercurrent overcurrent e Underfrequency overfrequency e Reversed flow of energy The data can also be displayed locally by the electronic trip unit The voltage t
220. s 4 connectors For required number of auxiliary supply connectors see table on Page 5 44 Type of auxiliary circuit connections without 0 with SIGUT screw type terminals if with tension spring connection 2 Position indicator switches without 0 AOUN O hwon o Nao Option 1 1 1 operation 1 changeover test 1 changeover disconnected 1 changeover Option 2 2 2 operation 3 changeover test 2 changeover disconnected 1 changeover Shutters without A A with shutter 2 parts lockable B Rated voltage DC 1000 V order with Z and order code A05 All other accessory parts must be ordered with Z and order codes see Circuit breakers non automatic circuit breakers up to 6300 A SENTRON WL Options Page 5 39 onwards 5 80 Siemens LV 30 2004 This quantity or a multiple thereof can be ordered Non Automatic Circuit Breakers for DC up to 4000 A Circuit diagrams Examples of application Rated operating voltage Required series breaks at rated voltage Operating currents up to 4000 A conducting path SENTRON WL Project planning aids for 3 pole non automatic circuit breakers for 4 pole non automatic circuit breakers Operating currents up to 4000 A conducting path up to 300 V 10 ee a 1 pole 2 pole 1 pole 2 pole 2 parallel conducting 4 parallel conducting paths 2 parallel conducting paths only with grounded neutral paths only with grounded neu
221. s the upper or lower connection areas to be opened separately for the purpose of checking that they are not live The divided shutter can be interlocked in the open or closed position and two padlocks can be fitted e Coding unit To prevent circuit breakers of the same size but of different de signs being mixed up in a switchgear cabinet the withdraw able circuit breakers and guide frames can be equipped with a coding device The coding device provides coding protec tion for up to 35 circuit breakers The circuit breakers in the withdrawable version are factory fitted with a rated current coding as standard This prevents a withdrawable circuit breaker being used in a guide frame that has a different rated current e Blocking mechanisms Fixed mounted circuit breakers To protect the operating personnel and the switchgear the fixed mounted circuit breakers can be fitted with a locking mechanism that prevents the switchgear cabinet door being opened when the circuit breaker is closed Withdrawable version For the protection of the operating personnel and the switch gear the withdrawable versions can be equipped with the following locking devices Blocking device to prevent opening of the cabinet door ac tive in the connected position Blocking device to prevent closing with the cabinet door open active in the connected position Blocking mechanism against movement with the cabinet door open If the cabinet door is op
222. selected 0 X5 g8 Remote reset magnet F7 required if c2 is not selected 1 X8 h Total number of auxiliary supply connectors max 4 5 44 Siemens LV 30 2004 Circuit Breakers Non Automatic Circuit Breakers up to 6300 A SENTRON WL Accessories spare parts Wi selection and ordering data Guide frame for AC circuit breakers non automatic circuit breakers Guide frame for 4 pole circuit breakers non automatic circuit breakers Max rated circuit breaker current Guide frame for 3 pole circuit breakers non automatic circuit breakers Size n max DT PS Weight DT PS Weight per PU per PU approx approx A kg kg Front main circuit connection single hole 1000 B 3WL9 211 1AAD0 ODA 1 1 uni 25 000 B 3WL9 211 1BADO ODA 1 1 uni 30 000 1600 B 3WL9 211 2AAO00 O00A 1 1 uni 25 000 B 3WL9 211 2BAD0 O0A 1 1 uni 30 000 2000 B 3WL9 212 3AAD0 O0A 1 1 uni 31 000 B 3WL9 212 3BAD0 ODA 1 1 uni 37 000 2500 B 38WL9 212 4AADI0 O0A 1 1 uni 39 000 B 3WL9 212 4BAD0 ODA 1 1 uni 47 000 3200 B 3WL9 212 5AA00 O0O0A 1 1 uni 45 000 B 3WL9 212 5BADO ODA 1 1 uni 54 000 Il 4000 B 3WL9 213 6AAD0 ODA 1 1 uni 60 000 B 3WL9 213 6BADO ODA 1 1 uni 84 000 Front main circuit connection double hole 1000 B 3WL9 211 1ABO0 ODA 1 1 uni 25 000 B 3WL9 211 1BBO0 OD0A 1 1 uni 30 000 l 1600 B 3WL9 211 2ABO0 ODA 1 1 uni 25 000 B 3WL9 211 2BBO0 O0A 1 1 uni 30 000 l 2000 B 3WL9 212 3ABO0 ODA 1 1 uni 31 000 B 3WL9 212 3BBO0 ODA 1 1 uni 37 000 l 2500
223. short circuit current at mounting location of circuit breaker IK max This value determines the short circuit breaking capacity or short circuit current carrying capacity of the circuit breaker e It is compared with the value Igy Zes Tew of the circuit breaker and essentially determines the size of the circuit breaker See Overview of SENTRON WL circuit breakers non auto matic circuit breakers e Rated current J which is to flow through the branch circuit This value must not be larger than the maximum rated current for the circuit breaker The rated current for the SENTRON WL is set with the rating plug See Overview of SENTRON WL circuit breakers non au tomatic circuit breakers e Ambient temperature for the circuit breaker This is usually the temperature inside the switchgear cabinet e Version of the circuit breaker e Minimum short circuit Current which flows through the switching device The trip unit must still detect this value as a short circuit and must respond by trip ping Protection functions of the circuit breaker These are determined by the selection of the corresponding electronic overcurrent trip unit See table Functions of the elec tronic overcurrent trip units under Functions Siemens LV 30 2004 5 19 Circuit Breakers Non Automatic Circuit Breakers up to 6300 A SENTRON WL General data T Technical specifications Short circuit breaking capacity S
224. surement module All specified delay times are minimum non release times circuit breaker opening time approx 20 ms Siemens LV 30 2004 5 90 in conjunction with additional functions 2 and interface DP 3WN6 1 With 3 pole circuit breakers a current transformer is required in addition if there is asymmetrical loading of the phases In the case of 4 pole circuit breakers a current transformer in the neutral conductor is fitted internally in the circuit breaker exception electronic trip units E and J For current transformers to be ordered separately see Page 5 108 Circuit Breakers up to 3200 A Discontinued Series General data Electronic trip unit V zn B azn C G aznNg D aznN E F aznNg H aznN J K aznNg N aznN P aznNg version 10th pos 7 7 of Order No e e e 10 s3 10 s3 2 30 s 2 30 s 2 30 s 2 30 s 2 30 s 2 30 s O e g e x A A A e e 50 or 50 or 50 or 20 100 20 100 20 100 20 100 100 100 100 1 25 12x 1 5 12x 1 25 12x 1 25 12xh 1 25 12x 0 5 12xh 0 5 12x n 1 25xI 40kA 1 25 xI 40kA 1 40 100 In 0 20 500 ms 0 20 400 ms 0 20 400 ms 20 400 ms 20 400 ms 20 4000 ms 20 4000 ms 20 400 ms 20 400 ms 80 300 ms 80 300 ms 80 300 ms 80 300 ms 80 300 ms 80 300 ms gt 15xI gt 15xI gt 15xI gt 1 5 12x GR eA gt 1 5 12x ESS 12xu75 Size Size and Jj with e with J 0o with I c up to 50 kA up to 50 kA with settin
225. t 43 000 65 B 3WL11 12 30033 1 unit 43 000 1600 1600 50 B 3WL11 16 20033 tunit 43 000 65 B 3WL11 16 30033 1 unit 43 000 800 800 80 B 3WL12 08 301033 1 unit 56 000 1000 1000 80 B 3WL12 10 301033 1 unit 56 000 1250 1250 80 B 3WL12 12 30033 1 unit 56 000 1600 1600 80 B 3WL12 16 30033 1 unit 56 000 2000 2000 65 B 3WL12 20 20033 1unit 56 000 80 B 3WL12 20 30033 1 unit 56 000 2500 2500 65 B 3WL12 25 20033 1unit 59 000 80 B 3WL12 25 301033 1 unit 59 000 3200 3200 80 B 3WL12 32 301033 1 unit 64 000 Front main circuit connection double hole 630 630 50 B 3WL11 06 20034 tunit 43 000 65 B 3WL11 06 30034 q1 unit 43 000 800 800 50 B 3WL11 08 20034 1unit 43 000 65 B 3WL11 08 30034 1 unit 43 000 1000 1000 50 B 3WL11 10 20034 tunit 43 000 65 B 3WL11 10 30034 1 unit 43 000 1250 1250 50 B 3WL11 12 20034 tunit 43 000 65 B 3WL11 12 30034 1 unit 43 000 1600 1600 50 B 3WL11 16 20034 unit 43 000 65 B 3WL11 16 30034 1 unit 43 000 800 800 80 B 3WL12 08 301034 1 unit 56 000 1000 1000 80 B 3WL12 10 30034 1 unit 56 000 1250 1250 80 B 3WL12 12 301034 1 unit 56 000 1600 1600 80 B 3WL12 16 300134 1 unit 56 000 2000 2000 65 B 3WL12 20 20034 tunit 56 000 80 B 3WL12 20 30034 1 unit 56 000 2500 2500 55 B 3WL12 25 20034 1unit 59 000 80 B 3WL12 25 30034 1 unit 59 000 32
226. t breaker 47 47 49 70 72 74 circuit approx kg breakers withdrawable circuit breaker 49 49 51 72 74 76 approx kg Guide frame approx kg 27 27 28 46 48 48 1 Figures apply to circuit breakers with order code KO3 see Options 4 These values apply in the case of sinusoidal current 50 60 Hz The heat 2 For fixed mounted circuit breakers with horizontal connection for with ing losses increase in the event of harmonics and higher frequencies drawable circuit breakers with vert conn see manual for 83WN6 circuit 5 Maintenance replacement of the contact set breakers 6 Per contact set Disconnect of the rated current J and power factor 0 8 3 The temperatures apply to the air surrounding the upper third of the circuit 7 Rated insulation voltage U AC 1000 V breaker 5 96 Siemens LV 30 2004 Circuit Breakers up to 3200 A Discontinued Series General data Operating mechanisms Manual operating mechanism with memory with mechanical closing Closing Max force required to operate the hand lever Charging stored Required number of strokes on the hand lever energy feature Manual operating mechanism with mechanical and electrical closing Charging stored energy feature Closing solenoid Y1 Operating range Extended operating range for battery operation Power input Minimum command duration at U for the activation solenoid Total closing time at U after start of closing command for the activati
227. t breakers also available with rated short time withstand current 11th to Toy 50 kA 1 s see Page 5 105 16th positions of the Order No see Page 5 104 1 4th current transformer is already fitted in the neutral conductor of the cir cuit breaker 2 Current transformers for overload protection in the neutral conductor and current transformers for ground fault protection must be ordered sepa rately see Page 5 108 3 The current transformer mounted in the star point of the transformer must be ordered separately see Page 5 108 4 A hand held device or the Win3WN6 software is required for operation 5 102 Siemens LV 30 2004 This quantity or a multiple thereof can be ordered Circuit Breakers up to 3200 A Discontinued Series 4 pole withdrawable design Version DT PS Weight per PU approx Rated operating voltage U up to AC 690 V 3WN6HNHE3 HEHEHEHE EEEE kg Size Size Rated current 7 Adjustment range of rated current J setting current Z 630 A 252 630 A A 0 D 1 unit 49 000 1000 A 400 1000 A A 2 F 1 unit 49 000 1600 A 640 1600 A A 4 H 1 unit 51 000 II 2000 A 800 2000 A A 5 J 1 unit 72 000 2500 A 1000 2500 A A 6 K 1 unit 74 000 3200 A 1280 3200 A A 7 M 1 unit 76 000 Installation type Main terminals see Page 5 85 Additional weight for guide frame Withdrawable Withdrawable circuit breaker without guide frame 7 without gesign Withdrawable circuit breaker with guide frame 8 Other Standard design
228. t of the transformer must be ordered separately see Page 5 108 4 A hand held device or the Win3WN6 software is required for operation This quantity or a multiple thereof can be ordered Siemens LV 30 2004 5 103 Circuit Breakers up to 3200 A Discontinued Series Selection and ordering data H a ol 3SWN6HEH1 HEHEHEHEH EEEE Operating Manual operating mechanism with stored energy feature with 05 mechanism mech closing W Manual operating mechanism with mechanical and electrical closing iy Activation solenoid AC 50 60 Hz V DCV 24 24 141 48 48 14 60 15 110 127 110 125 16 220 240 220 250 18 feature with mechanical and electrical closing M Manual motor operated mechanism with stored energy Motor Closing AC 50 60 Hz V DC V AC 50 60 Hz V DC V 24 24 24 5a 48 48 48 54 60 60 55 110 127 110 125 24 71 110 127 110 125 48 74 110 127 110 125 60 75 110 127 110 125 110 127 110 125 56 110 127 110 125 220 240 220 250 78 220 240 220 250 24 81 220 240 220 250 48 84 220 240 220 250 60 85 220 240 220 250 110 127 110 125 86 220 240 220 250 220 240 220 250 58 1st auxiliary Without 1st auxiliary release OA release Shunt release f F1 AC 50 60 HzV DCV 24 24 1B 30 1E 48 48 1F 60 1G 110 127 110 125 1H 220 240 220 250 1K Undervoltage release r F3 instantaneous O ms short delay 200 ms AC 50 60 Hz V DC V z 24 7 48 z 60 110 127 140 125 220 240
229. t protection requirements of distri bution systems motors transformers and generators When the circuit breakers are used in IT networks that are not grounded with converters connected in parallel to a common DC link rail suitable filter measures must be taken Please address any questions to your regional Siemens contact For more infor mation on electronic trip units see Electronic trip units and Functions Electronic trip units General description EMERGENCY STOP facility The 3WN6 circuit breakers can be used as an EMERGENCY STOP facility to DIN VDE 0113 if the circuit breaker is equipped with an undervoltage release and is used in conjunction with an EMERGENCY STOP control device Auxiliary and alarm switches e Ready to close If all the conditions are fulfilled so that the circuit breaker is ready to close this is indicated visually on the operator panel as well as by means of an indicator switch S7 e Contact position independent auxiliary switches The circuit breakers are supplied with 2 NO and 2 NC contacts or with 2 NO and 2 NC and 2 CO contacts according to order Siemens LV 30 2004 5 83 Circuit Breakers up to 3200 A Discontinued Series eE ELE SIMATIC HMI SIMATIC S5 S7 visualization s7 300 PROFIBUS DP MASTERDRIVE DP 3WN6 ET200X interface and 3UFS SIMOCODE DP distributed 3WN6 circuit motor protection I O device breaker and control device
230. tailed fault analysis e Graphics display with high con trast backlit display and sleep mode For technical details see table Function overview of the electronic overcurrent trip unit sys tem under Technical specifica tions Siemens LV 30 2004 5 17 Circuit Breakers Non Automatic Circuit Breakers up to 6300 A SENTRON WL eE ELE Ground fault protection Ground fault releases G sense fault currents that flow to ground and that can cause fire in the plant Multiple circuit breakers connected in series can have their delay times adjusted so as to provide graduated discrimination When setting the parameters for the electronic overcurrent trip unit it is possible to choose between alarm and trip in the event that the set current value is exceeded The reason for trip ping is indicated by means of an LED when the query button is activated Modules The electronic overcurrent trip unit versions ETU45B ETU55B and ETU76B can be retrofitted with a ground fault module The electronic overcurrent trip unit ETU27B is fitted with this module as standard Two versions can be ordered e GFM AT Alarm and tripping e GFM A Only alarm Siemens LV 30 2004 5 18 Selector for Indicator earth fault earth fault detection alarm GFM A 45B ALARM tg s 5 Rotary switch for setting value earth fault protection delay tP ty Rotary switch NSE0_00961 for setting value earth fault
231. th padlocks Size III R2 4 pole Size T R 2 Size II R Size III R Position indicator switch for guide Connected Test Discon frames position position nected position 1CO 1CO 1CO RGIS 3CO 2CO 100 RIA6 1 Padlocks not included in scope of supply 2 Not possible with option rated voltage AC DC 1000 V order code A05 Not possible with DC version Not possible with fixed mounted design ERE Siemens LV 30 2004 5 39 Circuit Breakers Non Automatic Circuit Breakers up to 6300 A SENTRON WL Add Z to the complete Order No and Order Order No with Z indicate the appropriate order code s code 1234567 8 9101112 13141516 IWLEa eae Se o 2 and additional order code s 000 Code for Further versions Z Order Order code for code for withdrawable fixed moun version ted version Locking devices Locking device against unauthorized closing in the operator control panel The disconnector unit fulfills the require ade by CES ISo SIO1 ments for main circuit breakers to ade by IKON Slo slol3 EN 60204 VDE 0113 F Y 1 S1013 I I ounting set FORTRESS or
232. the fixed mounted circuit breaker Connecting bars up to 1000 A 3 pole 1se 1 A 3WX36 21 7AA00 1 se 2 000 for vertical connection 4 pole set A 3WX3621 7AB00 1 se 2 700 1250 1600 A 3 pole set A 3WX36 21 7BA00 1 se 4 100 4 pole set A 3WX36 21 7BB00 1 se 5 400 2000 A Il 3 pole 1set A 3WX36 21 7DA00 1 se 5 500 4 pole set A 3WX36 21 7DB00 1 se 7 400 2500 3200 A Il 3 pole set A 3WX36 21 7FA00 1 se 4 800 4 pole set A 3WX36 21 7FB00 1 se 6 500 1 1 set 3 units 2 1 set 4 units This quantity or a multiple thereof can be ordered Siemens LV 30 2004 5 109 Circuit Breakers up to 3200 A Discontinued Series Accessories spare parts Version DT PS Weight per PU approx Guide frame standard design 3WX3683 HABBO kg 3 pole 4 pole I Rated 1000 A size B 2 1 unit 22 000 27 000 current i n of withdrawable 1600 A size B 4 1 uns 23 000 24 000 circuit breaker 2000 A size Il B 5 1 unit 35 000 46 000 2500 A size II B 6 tunit 37 000 48 000 3200 A size Il B T tunit 37 000 48 000 Auxiliary supply 1 auxiliary supply connector B connectors ii see table below for 2 auxiliary supply connectors c required quantity 3 auxiliary supply connectors D 4 auxiliary supply connectors E Number of poles 3 pole 1 4 pole 3 For other versions such as front connection position indicator switch shutter see Page 5 107 Designation Required order DT PS W
233. ting Sealing ring Rotary switch for delay earth fault protection Rotary switch for setting value earth fault protection Query pushbutton Test pushbutton Jee Clear pushbutton CLEAR Test socket ETU45B electronic overcurrent trip unit Mechanical RESET Wm rESET for reclosing lockout E Scroll up Option safety lock prevents pressing of reset button after overcurrent release Indicators Option alphanumeric display Overcurrent release activated Overload alarm COMMUNICATION EXPANDED Scroll down Indicator fault in overcurrent release Thermal memory on off N conductor protection on off Setting value N conductor overload Transfer of overload characteristic t t Rated current module Rotary switch for setting value overload release Rotary switch for setting value instantaneous short circuit release Rotary switch for delay overload release Rotary switch for delay short circuit release Indicator cause of release Sealing ring Option earth fault module Indicator earth fault alarm Rotary switch for setting value short circuit protection Selector for earth fault protection Rotary switch for setting value earth fault protection Indicator earth fault tripped Rotary switch for delay 3 earth fault protection tll ty Clear pushbutton Test socket Rotary switch for setting value earth fault alarm Test pushbut
234. tion and NSE 01023 monitoring 3WL9 111 1AT23 0AAO Breaker Data Adapter BDA B 3WL9 111 2AT28 0AA0 1 unit on req Configuration control diagnostics and test of SENTRON circuit breakers via local interface Breaker Data Adapter connecting cable to SENTRON circuit breakers for programming device e g notebook can be run with Internet Explorer with JAVA2 VM BDA Plus B 3WL9 111 2AT33 0AA0 tunit on req Same as BDA but with additional Ethernet inter face for connection to Ethernet Intranet Internet Retrofitting and spare parts for communication via PROFIBUS COM15 PROFIBUS module C 3WL9 111 1AT65 0AA0 tunit on req Breaker status sensor BSS C 3WL9 111 1AT16 0AA0 1 unit on req Measurement function without voltage transformer X 3WL9 111 1AT02 0AA0 1 unit on req Manual test device for electronic trip units D 3WL9 111 2AT31 0AA0 1 unit on req For further mechanical accessories see Pages 5 46 to 5 55 For tripping characteristics and dimensions as for Circuit break ers non automatic circuit breakers up to 6300 A SENTRON WL see Pages 5 57 to 5 67 1 Every CubicleBUS module is supplied with a factory fitted 0 2 m cable 2 Contains a 2 m CubicleBUS cable in addition Siemens LV 30 2004 5 76 This quantity or a multiple thereof can be ordered L Non Automatic Circuit Breakers for DC up to 4000 A SENTRON WL General data m Technical specifications
235. to 2500 A B 3WL9 111 0AL54 0AA0 1 unit on req Size II up to 3200 A B 3WL9 111 0AL55 0AA0 junit on req 3WL9 111 0AL14 OAAO Size III up to 4000 A B 3WL9 111 0AL56 0AA0 1 unit on req Front Size I up to 1000 A B 3WL9111 OAL07 OAAO junit on req accessible Size 1250 A 1600 A B 3WL9111 0AL08 0AAO junit on req main circuit connections to DIN 43673 Size II up to 2000 A B 3WL9111 0AL11 0AAO junit on req double hole at top Size Il up to 2500 A B 3WL9111 0AL12 0AA0 1unit on req Size II up to 3200 A B 3WL9111 0AL13 0AA0 tunit on req Size III up to 4000 A B 3WL9111 0AL14 0AAO tunit on req Front Size up to 1000 A B 3WL9 111 0AL57 0OAAO junit on req SWL9 111 0AL64 0AAO accessible i Size 1250 A 1600 A B 3WL9111 0AL58 0AA0 1unit on req main circuit connections to DIN 43673 Size Il up to 2000 A B 3WL9 111 0AL61 0OAAO junit on req double hole at bottom Size Il up to 2500 A B 3WL9111 0AL62 0AA0 1unit on req Size II up to 3200 A B 3WL9 111 0AL63 0AA0 1 unit on req Size III up to 4000 A B 3WL9111 0AL64 0AA0 tunit on req Rear Size 11 up to 1600 A B 3WL9111 0AM01 0AA0 junit on req vertical Size II up to 3200 A B 3WL9111 0AM02 0AAO 1unit on req main circuit connections Size III up to 6300 A B 3WL9 111 0AM03 0AA0 1unit on req NSE 01012 3WL9 111 0AM03 0AA0 1 In the case of vertical connection size up to 1000 A 1 vertical connection 3WL9 111 0AM01 0AA0 is required up to
236. ton Query pushbutton NSEO_00957 Siemens LV 30 2004 5 16 Application Classical building motor and plant protection with time selective coordination for up to 6800 A Features The same as ETU25B but also including e Reversible neutral conductor protection e Permanently integrated ground fault protection Calculation of the ground fault current through vectorial summation current for mation For technical details see table Function overview of the elec tronic overcurrent trip unit system under Technical specifications Application Low cost all round system for intelligent buildings and all types of industrial applications CubicleBUS integrated Features The same as ETU25B but also including e Adjustable time lag class for overload protection e Selectable characteristic for over load and short delayed short cir cuit range current discrimination for more accurate discrimination adaptation to upstream fuses and protection devices e Thermal image as restart protec tion for tripped motor outgoing feeders e Reversible and adjustable neutral conductor protection e Modular ground fault module with alarm and tripping functions which can be set separately e Communication interface measurement function Plus optional connection of external modules or for retrofitting e Extended protection functions possible with measurement func tion e Optional high contrast display with
237. uble hole at top and bottom holes in accordance with DIN 43673 up to 1000 A 1250 A 1600 A 2000 A 2500 A 3200 A Circuit breakers also available with rated short time withstand current 11th to Tew 50 kA 1 s see Page 5 105 16th positions of the Order No see Page 5 130 1 unit 47 000 1 unit 49 000 1 unit 70 000 1 unit 72 000 1 unit 74 000 5 128 Siemens LV 30 2004 This quantity or a multiple thereof can be ordered Non Automatic Circuit Breakers up to 3200 A Discontinued Series 4 pole drawable design ps DT Version Rated operating voltage U up to AC 690 V without electronic trip unit system Size Rated current J rated current In 1000 A 1 unit 49 000 1600 A 1 unit 51 000 Il 2000 A 1 unit 72 000 2500 A 1 unit 74 000 3200 A 1 unit 76 000 Installation type Main circuit connections see Page 5 85 Withdrawable Withdrawable circuit breaker without guide frame 7 gesign Withdrawable circuit breaker with guide frame 8 Other Standard version Rear versions of the horizontal circuit connections with guide rails guide frame up to 1000 A 27 000 see Page 5 110 1250 A 1600 A 28 000 2000 A 46 000 2500 A 48 000 3200 A 48 000 Circuit breakers also available with rated short time withstand current 11th to Tew 50 kA 1 s see Page 5 105 16th positions of the Order No see Page 5 130 This quantity or a multiple thereof can be ordered Siemens L
238. ues This means that it is not only possible to monitor the device re motely but also to transmit current values from the entire system and perform switching operations remotely Ft and Ift characteristic for overload protection The best protection for the whole switchgear is achieved by set ting the tripping characteristic to an optimum value In order to achieve optimal discrimination for upstream fuses or medium voltage protection systems the inclination of the characteristic can be selected for the overload range The overload protection L long time protection for the elec tronic overcurrent trip units ETU45B ETU55B and ETU76B al lows the characteristic to be switched between t and 74t The 7ft characteristic improves discrimination for downstream circuit breakers and fuses Electronic overcurrent trip units ETU Modularity has also been strictly emphasized during the devel opment of the electronic overcurrent trip units These are some of the modules which can be easily retrofitted at any time e Ground fault protection modules e Communication e Measurement function e Displays e Rated current modules rating plugs This allows quick adaptation to new local mains specifications In addition new innovative functions have been included in the ETUs Siemens LV 30 2004 5 14 Tripped indication reset button Text display with 15 inclination rotatable 180 Microswitch for switchable o
239. ule SISSSSSSSSSSSS ISSISISISISSSISISSSSD ES ISS ETU fault Delay time figures given in ms v Available 1 Setting range of the operating current M motor protection corresponds to 20 ms Not available Size and size Il Size III O Optional A 100 A 400 A B 300 A 600 A C 600 A 800 A D 900 A 1000 A E 1200 A 1200 A For tripping characteristics and dimensions as for Circuit breakers non automatic circuit breakers up to 6300 A SENTRON WL see Pages 5 57 to 5 67 5 72 Siemens LV 30 2004 Circuit Breakers Approved acc to UL 489 up to 5000 A SENTRON WL 3 pole fixed mounted design H selection and ordering data Size Max rated Rated current Switching capacity 480 V PS Weight circuit breaker J per PU current In max approx A A kA DT kg Horizontal main circuit connection 1000 1000 65 B 3WL51 10 301032 1 unit 43 000 1600 1600 65 B 3WL51 16 30032 1 unit 43 000 Il 2000 2000 100 B 3WL52 20 40032 1 unit 56 000 Il 2500 2500 100 B 3WL52 25 40032 1 unit 59 000 Il 3000 3000 100 B 3WL52 30 40032 1 unit 64 000 Ul 4000 4000 100 C 3WL53 40 401032 1 unit 82 000 ll 5000 5000 100 C 3WL53 50 401032 1 unit 82 000 Vertical main circuit connection 1000 1000 65 B 3WL51 10 301031 1 unit 43 000 1600 1600 65 B 3WL51 16 30031 1 unit 43 000 2000 2000 100 B 3WL52 20 401031 1 unit 56 000 25
240. unit on req Measurement function Plus without voltage transformer B 3WL9111 0AT03 0AA0 1 unit on req All communication components CubicleBUS modules and measurement functions are available for the ETU45B ETU55B and ETU76B trip units 1 Each CubicleBUS module is supplied with a 0 2 m factory fitted cable to connect the modules with each other A longer factory fitted cable is required for connection to the circuit breaker This quantity or a multiple thereof can be ordered Siemens LV 30 2004 Circuit Breakers Non Automatic Circuit Breakers up to 6300 A SENTRON WL Accessories spare parts Designation DT Order No RS Weight per PU approx kg Main circuit connections fixed mounting 3WL9 111 OALO6 OAAO Specified for each connection Front accessible main circuit connections Size up to 1000 A B 3WL9111 0AL01 0AAO unit on req single hole at top Size 1250 A 1600 A B 3WL9 111 0AL02 0AA0 tunit on req Size II up to 2000 A B 3WL9111 0AL03 0AAO junit on req Size II up to 2500 A B 3WL9 111 0AL04 0AA0 tunit on req Size II up to 3200 A B 3WL9111 0AL05 0AAO tunit on req 3WL9 111 OALS6 OAAO Size IIl up to 4000 A B 3WL9111 0AL06 0AAO junit on req Front accessible Size I up to 1000 A B 3WL9111 0AL51 OAAO junit on req main circuit connections Size 1250 A 1600 A B 3WL9 111 0AL52 0AA0 junit on req single hole at bottom Size II up to 2000 A B 3WL9111 0AL53 0AAO junit on req Size II up
241. unit on req Size III B 3WL9111 OAP07 0OAAO 1 unit on req NSE01020 SWLO 111 0AP01 0AA0 4 oie Size B 3WL9111 0AP08 0AAO 4 unit on req Size II B 3WL9111 0AP11 OAAO 1 unit on req Size III B 3WL9 111 0AP12 0AA0 1 unit on req Arc chute Size B 3WL9111 0AS01 0OAAO 1 unit on req Size II B 3WL9111 0AS02 0AAO 1 unit on req Size III B 3WL9111 0AS03 0AA0 1 unit on req Size II B 3WL9111 0AS05 0OAAO 1 unit on req 3WL9 1 i enenaamaG i Size III B 3WL9 111 0AS06 0AA0O 1 unit on req Arc chute cover Parts kit for guide frame 3 pole Size B 3WL9111 0AS32 0AA0 1 unit on req Size II B 3WL9111 0AS36 0AA0 1 unit on req Size III B 3WL9111 0AS38 0AA0 1 unit on req 4 pole Size B 3WL9111 0AS42 0AA0 1unit onreq Size II B 3WL9111 0AS44 0AA0 1 unit on req Size III B 3WL9111 0AS46 0AAO 1 unit on req Withdrawable part coding Withdrawable part coding B 3WL9111 0AR12 0AA0 1unit on req by customer for 36 coding variants Ground fault protection Ground fault protection between guide frame and with drawable circuit breaker Size Il B 3WL9 111 OBA01 0AA0O 1 unit on req For 30 kA switching capacity Size III B 3WL9111 0BA02 0AAO 1 unit on req Contact module for guide frame Contact module for withdrawable circuit breaker 3 pole Size B 3WL9 111 0BA05 0AA0 junit on req Size II B 3WL9111 OBA06 0AA0 1 unit on req Size III B 3WL9111 0BA07 0AA0O junit onreq 4 pole Size B 3WL9111 OBA08 0AAO unit on re
242. ures The SENTRON WL circuit breakers are climate proof in accor dance with DIN IEC 68 Part 30 2 They are intended for use in enclosed areas where no severe operating conditions e g dust corrosive vapors damaging gases are present When installed in dusty and damp areas suitable enclosures must be provided Coordinated dimensions The dimensions of SENTRON WL circuit breakers of the same in stallation type only differ in terms of the width of the device which depends on the number of poles and the frame size Due to the nature of the design the dimensions of devices with a withdrawable design are determined by the dimensions of the guide frames which are slightly larger Non automatic circuit breakers One special type of circuit breaker is utilized as a non automatic circuit breaker The non automatic circuit breakers are de signed without an electronic overcurrent trip unit system and do not perform any protection duties for the system One potential application is the use as a bus coupler in systems with parallel feed ins The designs and specifications can be selected according to those of the circuit breakers Operating mechanisms The switches are available with various optional operating mechanisms e Manual operating mechanism with mechanical closing standard design e Manual operating mechanism with mechanical and electrical closing e Motorized operating mechanism with mechanical and electri cal
243. verload characteristic S ween R wasg AA T x Rated current module rating plug Ground fault protection module retrofittable Example of configuration for ETU45B Rated current module rating plug The rated current module is an exchangeable module which al lows the user to reduce the rated device current so as to adapt it optimally to the plant e g if a new plant section is taken into operation The rated current module must be selected to fit the rated current of the plant Selectable parameters In the case of quick changes of power supply conditions e g for switchovers from transformer to generator operation or if a sec tion of the supply is shutdown when the shift changes SENTRON WL allows the relevant protection parameters to be quickly adapted to the new conditions The ETUs contain two independent tripping characteristics parameter sets The switchover is completed within 200 ms and is performed with the help of an external signal Circuit Breakers Non Automatic Circuit Breakers up to 6300 A ETU15B electronic overcurrent trip unit BREAKER TRIPPED Mechanical RESET for reclosing lockout Indicator overcurrent release activated Indicator overload alarm Rotary switch for setting value overload release Rotary switch for setting value instantaneous short circuit release NSEO_00954 ETU25B electronic overcurrent trip unit BREAKER TRIPPED H Mechanical RESET _ fo
244. versions in accordance with UL 489 The arc chute cover protects switchgear components which are located directly above the circuit breaker Door sealing frame and cover SENTRON WL circuit breakers have degree of protection IP20 as standard However if the switchgear is to be equipped with a higher degree of protection a door sealing frame with IP40 and a cover with IP55 are available Mutual mechanical interlocking of circuit breakers examples Mutual interlocking of two circuit breakers Interlocking between three circuit breakers Mutual interlocking of three circuit breakers Interlocking of three circuit breakers two of them mutual NSE01041 T amp 8 ia NSE01042 NSE01043 29 8 NSE01044 NSE01045 Siemens LV 30 2004 5 11 Circuit Breakers Non Automatic Circuit Breakers up to 6300 A SENTRON WL eE ELE Functions Functions of the electronic overcurrent trip units ETU25B NSE00880a NSE00881a NSE00882a NSE0_00950b NSE0_00951b NSE0_00952b ETU15B ETU25B ETU27B Overload protection Short time delayed short circuit protection nstantaneous short circuit protection Neutral conductor protection Ground fault protection KIRIS OG Z amor l l A S INNIS Additional functions N conductor protection can be switched on off Short time delayed short circuit protection can be switched on off 7 Non
245. witching capacity H 440 V PS Weight rele per PU approx kA DT kg l 800 800 100 B 3WL12 08 40032 1 unit 56 000 l 1000 1000 100 B 3WL12 10 40032 1 unit 56 000 l 1250 1250 100 B 3WL12 12 40032 1 unit 56 000 l 1600 1600 100 B 3WL12 16 40032 1 unit 56 000 l 2000 2000 100 B 3WL12 20 40032 1 unit 56 000 2500 2500 100 B 3WL12 25 40032 1 unit 59 000 3200 3200 100 B 3WL12 32 40032 1 unit 64 000 1119 4000 4000 100 C 3WL13 40 40032 1 unit 82 000 118 5000 5000 100 C 3WL13 50 40032 1 unit 82 000 Vertical main circuit connection l 800 800 100 B 3WL12 08 40031 1 unit 56 000 l 1000 1000 100 B 3WL12 10 40031 1 unit 56 000 l 1250 1250 100 B 3WL12 12 40031 1 unit 56 000 l 1600 1600 100 B 3WL12 16 40031 1 unit 56 000 l 2000 2000 100 B 3WL12 20 40031 1 unit 56 000 l 2500 2500 100 B 3WL12 25 40031 1 unit 59 000 l 3200 3200 100 B 3WL12 32 40031 1 unit 64 000 1119 4000 4000 100 C 3WL13 40 40031 1 unit 82 000 1115 5000 5000 100 C 3WL13 50 40031 1 unit 82 000 11 6300 6300 100 C 3WL13 63 40031 1 unit 82 000 Front main circuit connection single hole l 800 800 100 B 3WL12 08 40033 1 unit 56 000 l 1000 1000 100 B 3WL12 10 40033 1 unit 56 000 l 1250 1250 100 B 3WL12 12 40033 1 unit 56 000 l 1600 1600 100 B 3WL12 16 40033 1 unit 56 000 l 2000 2000 100 B 3WL12 20 40033 1 unit 56 000 l 2500 2500 100 B 3WL12
246. withdrawable circuit breaker is in the connected position Blocking mechanism via mechanical ON and OFF buttons The mechanical ON and OFF buttons are covered with a cap which only allows activation with a tool These covering caps are part of the locking set Siemens LV 30 2004 5 10 Additional equipment for guide frames Shutters The sealing strips of the shutter seal the laminated contacts of the guide frame when the withdrawable circuit breaker is re moved and therefore implement shock protection The sealing strips can be manually opened using the strip le vers The position of the sealing strips can be locked in various posi tions using padlocks for securing against tampering Rated current coding unit between circuit breaker and guide frame Withdrawable circuit breakers and guide frames are equipped with a rated current coding unit as standard This ensures that only circuit breakers whose penetration blades are suited to the laminated contacts of the guide frame can be inserted into a guide frame see diagram below NSE01031 1 Guide frame interior of I h side interior of r h side similar 2 Coding pin on racking rail in guide frame 3 Racking rail 4 Withdrawable circuit breaker r h side I h side similar 5 Coding pin on guide frame Rated current coding unit between circuit breaker and guide frame Equipment dependent coding Withdrawable circuit breakers and guide
247. x Us 1 max 5 min min 5 s as with for continuous command Siemens LV 30 2004 Circuit Breakers up to 3200 A Discontinued Series General data Auxiliary releases 2 0 85 x U circuit breaker can be closed 0 35 0 7 x U circuit breaker is tripped Undervoltage Operating values release r F3 and ro F8 Operating range Extended operating range in battery operation Rated control supply voltage Us Power input Opening time of circuit breaker at Us 0 Design r F3 Instantaneous With 100 ms delay Design rc F8 With delay tg 0 2 3 2 s pickup dropout for DC 24 V DC 30 V DC 48 V DC 60 V DC 110 V DC 220 V AC 50 60 Hz V DC Vv AC VA DC W ms ms S Reset via additional NC contact direct switching off Short circuit protection ms Smallest permissible DIAZED fuse operational class gL miniature circuit breaker with C characteristic Contact position driven auxiliary switches S1 S2 S3 S4 0 85 1 1 x Us 0 7 1 26 x Us 110 127 220 240 380 415 24 48 60 110 125 220 250 15 15 lt 100 lt 300 O2 on G2 lt 100 1A TDz time lag 1 A Rated insulation voltage U Rated operating voltage U Switching capacity AC 50 60 Hz Rated operating voltage Ue Rated operating current AC 12 Rated operating current J AC 15 Rated operating voltage Ue Rated operating current J DC 12 Rated operating current J DC 13 DC Short
248. xcitation and 100 ON time for permanent excitation This means that it is also possible to block the circuit breaker against being jogged into closing An energy storage device for shunt releases allows the circuit breaker to be opened even if the control voltage is no longer available Undervoltage release The undervoltage release causes the circuit breaker to be opened if the operating voltage falls below a certain value or is not applied The circuit breaker cannot be opened manually or by means of an electrical ON command if the undervoltage re lease is not connected to the rated voltage The undervoltage re lease has no delay as standard A delay can be set by the cus tomer in the range between ty lt 80 ms and ty lt 200 ms In addition an undervoltage release with a delay in the range from 0 2 to 3 2 s is available Alarm switch for auxiliary releases One signal contact is used for each auxiliary release to deter mine the positions of the auxiliary releases Closing solenoid The closing solenoid is used to close the circuit breaker electri cally by means of a local electrical ON command or by a remote unit Motorized operating mechanism The operating mechanism is used to load the storage spring au tomatically The operating mechanism is activated if the storage spring has been unloaded and the control voltage is available It is switched off automatically after loading This does not affect manual loa
249. z V DCV Rated control supply voltage must correspond 110 127 110 115 B 3WL9111 0BA13 0AA0 1ST 0 500 with rated control supply voltage of shunt release i 220 240 220 250 B 3WL9 111 0BA14 0AA0 1ST 0 500 EMC Filter NSEO_00995a EMC Filter Delivery as of July 2004 X 3WL9 111 0AK32 0AA0 1ST onreq 3WL9 111 OAHO7 OAAO NSEO 00997a 3WL9 111 OAJO OAAO P ii NSE0_00998a L 3WL9 111 0AJ06 0AA0 3WL9 111 0BA72 0AA0 1 Not possible with motor shutdown switch 2 Not possible with electrical ON button 3 Only in conjunction with motorized operating mechanism 4 Not possible with communication connection option order code F02 5 X7 manual connector required for circuit breakers or guide frames If this is not already available please order additionally see Pages 5 44 and 5 49 Siemens LV 30 2004 This quantity or a multiple thereof can be ordered 5 48 Circuit Breakers Non Automatic Circuit Breakers up to 6300 A SENTRON WL Accessories spare parts Designation DT Order No PS Weight per PU approx ir z aa g Male connector for circuit breakers B 3WL9 111 0AB01 0AA0 unit on req f Prolongation for male connector 1000 V version B 3WL9 111 0AB02 0AA0 junit on req 2 male connector must be ordered separately Male connector and prolongation for 1000 V B 3WL9111 0AB10 0AAO junit onreq Manual connector for circuit breaker Screw type terminals B 3WL9111 0

Circuit-Breakers/Non-Automatic Circuit

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents